PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
Areas Covered
Before Reading This Manual
This section explains the notes for your safety and conventions used in this manual. Make sure to read this
section.
Chapter 1
This chapter explains component names and basic operations of this server, as well as an
overview of the software provided with this server. In addition, the workflow, from placing
the server to starting the operation, is also described.
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Appendix
This chapter explains the preparation on the server and cautions necessary before OS
installation. Please read this chapter before starting installation.
This chapter explains how to install the OS in the server using ServerStart.
This chapter explains how to install the OS without using ServerStart.
This chapter explains the operations to be performed after OS installation. Be sure to perform
those operations before operating the server.
For stable PRIMERGY server operations, we recommend that high reliability tools be
installed. This chapter explains the installation and necessary settings of high reliability tools.
This chapter explains how to install and remove the various internal options in this server.
This chapter explains how to make the environment settings necessary to operate the server.
This chapter explains the operations necessary after starting to use this server as well as daily
care and maintenance.
This appendix explains the specifications for the server and internal options. It also covers
how to recycle the products.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
Remarks
■ Warning Descriptions
Various symbols are used throughout this manual. These are used to emphasize important points for your
safety and that of others. The following are the symbols and their meanings.
Ignoring this symbol could be potentially lethal.
Ignoring this symbol may lead to physical injury and/or damage the server or hardware options.
The following symbols are used to indicate the type of warning or caution being described.
The triangle mark emphasizes the urgency of the WARNING and CAUTION. Details are
detailed inside the triangle and above it.
A barred circle ( ) warns against certain actions (Do Not). These actions are detailed inside
the circle and above it.
A black circle indicates actions that must be taken. These actions are detailed inside the black
circle and above it.
■ Symbols
Symbols used in this manual have the following meanings.
These sections explain prohibited actions and points to note when using this device. Make
sure to read these sections.
These sections explain information needed to operate the hardware and software properly.
Make sure to read these sections.
This mark indicates reference pages or manuals.
→
■ Key Descriptions / Operations
Keys are represented throughout this manual in the following manner.
E.g.: [Ctrl] key, [Enter] key, [→] key, etc.
The following indicate pressing several keys at once.
E.g.: [Ctrl] + [F3] key, [Shift] + [↑] key, etc.
■ Entering Commands (Keys)
Command entries are displayed in the following way.
•
•
•
In the areas of the "↑" mark, press the [Space] key once.
When the operating system is Windows, commands are not case sensitive.
CD-ROM drive names are shown as [CD-ROM drive]. Enter your drive name according to your
environment.
[CD-ROM drive]:\setup.exe
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Screen Shots and Figures
Screen shots and figures are used as visual aids throughout this manual. Windows, screens, and file
names may vary depending on the server. Figures in this manual may not show cables that are actually
connected for convenience of explanation.
■ Consecutive Operations
Consecutive operations are described by connecting them with arrows (→).
Example: Procedure of clicking the [Start] button, pointing to [Programs], and clicking [Accessories]
↓
Click [Start] → [Programs] → [Accessories].
■ Abbreviations
The following expressions and abbreviations are used throughout this manual.
This document may contain information on other operating systems.
table: Abbreviations of Product Names
Product name
PRIMERGY RX200 S2
Expressions and abbreviations
This server or the server
Microsot® Windows Server™ 2003, Standard
Edition
Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition,
or Windows Server 2003
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003, Enterprise
Edition
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition,
or Windows Server 2003
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Windows 2000 Advanced Server,
or Windows 2000 Server
Windows
Microsoft® Windows® Preinstallation Environment
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Windows PE
Windows XP Professional
Windows 2000 Professional
Windows NT
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation Operating
System 4.0
Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® AS
Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® ES
Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS
Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES
Linux
■ Server Types
The following expressions and abbreviations are used for server types throughout this manual.
table: Server Types
Type
Expressions and abbreviations
Servers without an internal hard disk unit
Diskless type
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
Reference Information
■ Software Manuals
Software Manual contains other reference information and cautions for ServerStart not described in this
manual.
Please read it before using ServerStart.
Software Manual is contained as a "README.TXT" file in the root directory on the ServerStart CD-
ROM.
Use a text editor to read it.
■ Latest Information about Software Provided with This Server
For the latest information regarding ServerStart and other software provided with this server, refer to the
Fujitsu PRIMERGY website (http://primergy.fujitsu.com).
Warning and Caution Labels
Warning and caution labels are found on the server.
Do not remove or stain these labels.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
Contents
1.1 RX200 S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.2.1 Setup Support Tool - ServerStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
1.2.2 High Reliability Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
1.2.3 Installing High Reliability Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
1.3.1 Server (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
1.3.3 Server (Internal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
1.3.4 Baseboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
1.4.1 Opening the Rack Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
1.4.2 Turning On the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
1.4.3 Turning Off the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
1.4.4 Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
1.4.5 Inserting and Ejecting a CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
1.5 Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.1.2 Hardware Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
2.3.1 Installation Partition Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
2.3.2 Notes on Configuring RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
2.3.4 Cautions for Using ServerStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
2.4.1 Installing ServerStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
2.4.2 Uninstalling ServerStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
3.1 Guided Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1.4 Disk wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.1.7 Close/save the Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.1.8 Starting OS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.2.1 Starting Up the Preconfiguration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.2.3 Close/save the Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.2.4 Starting OS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.3 Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.3.1 Starting Up the Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.3.5 Starting OS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.4.1 Overview of Remote Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.4.4 Preparation of Remote Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.5 Installation on Multiple (the Second and Subsequent) Servers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.5.3 Installation in Preconfiguration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
4.1.1 Required Driver Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.2.1 Installing Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4.2.2 Installing Windows 2000 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
5.2.1 Creating the Automated System Recovery (ASR) Set
For Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
5.3.1 How to Store the BIOS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
5.4.1 Creating a DOS Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
5.5.1 Updating the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
5.5.6 Other Notes on Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
5.6.1 Intel® PROSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
5.6.3 Teaming Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
5.6.4 VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
5.6.5 Local Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
7.2.1 How to Remove the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
7.3.1 Where to Install CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
7.3.3 How to Install a CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.5.1 Where to Install an Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
7.5.3 How to Install an Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
7.7.2 Installable Internal Hard Disk Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
7.8.1 Where to Install the Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
7.8.2 Installable Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
7.8.4 Replacing a Power Supply Unit when the Redundant Function is Enabled
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
8.2.3 Primary Master Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
8.2.4 Boot Options Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
8.2.6 Peripheral Configuration Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
8.2.7 PCI Configuration Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
8.2.9 Power On/Off Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
8.2.10 Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
8.2.11 Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
8.2.13 CPU Status Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
8.2.14 Memory Status Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.2.15 LAN Setting Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
8.2.17 Exit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
8.3.2 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
8.3.3 Boot Adapter List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
8.3.4 Global Properties Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
8.3.6 Device Properties Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
8.3.8 Formatting hard disks physically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
9.1.1 Checking the Server Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
9.1.2 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
9.2.2 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
9.2.3 Software Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
9.3.2 Viewing the System Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
9.4 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
9.4.1 Hardware Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
9.4.2 Security against Unauthorized Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
9.5 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
9.5.1 Importance of Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
9.6.1 For Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
9.6.2 For Windows 2000 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
9.7.1 Checking before OS Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
9.7.2 Reinstallation Using ServerStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
9.8.1 For Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
9.8.2 For Windows 2000 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.9.2 Contacting Maintenance Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
9.10.1 Hard disk failure is detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
B.4 Internal Hard Disk Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
B.5 Power Cord Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
C.1 Connecting the Server to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
C.3 Switching between Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Overview
This chapter explains component names and
basic operations of this server, as well as an
overview of the software provided with this
server.In addition, the workflow, from placing the
server to starting the operation, is also
described.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 RX200 S2
This server has the following features.
■ High Reliability
● Advanced Memory Protection Function
The server supports the Chipkill function using PC2-3200-compliant memory (DDR2 400 SDRAM) to
enable data recovery in the event of a memory error.
● Disk Array System Configuration
A disk array system (RAID1) can be configured using the onboard SCSI array controller.
● Redundant Function
The hard disk units, power supply units, and fans (only CPU/power supply fans) support the redundant
function.
A failed hard disk unit in a disk array system can be replaced or repaired without turning off the server
and peripheral devices (a hot plug is supported).
Adding an optional power supply unit enables the redundant function.
● Hardware and Software Designed for Data Security
The locks on the rack and security (password) setting in the BIOS Setup Utility protect hardware and
data assets in the server against theft, ensuring data security with high reliability.
● Proactive Fan Function
When a fan fails or the ambient temperature rises, the system fan speed is increased automatically to
avoid increase in temperature in the server, ensuring stable server operation.
● High Reliability Tools
High reliability tools offer stable system operation. For information about high reliability tools, refer to
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ High-speed Processing
● 64-bit Intel® Xeon™ Processors
The server can have up to two 64-bit Intel® Xeon™ processors for high-speed data processing (one
processor in standard servers).
1
The server supports the Hyper-Threading function that uses one physical CPU as two logical CPUs,
providing high-efficiency and high-speed processing.
● PCI-X
The server uses PCI-X buses with a maximum data transfer speed of 1066MB/sec.
● Ultra320 SCSI (Onboard SCSI Array Controller)
The onboard SCSI array controller supports the Ultra320 SCSI interface that provides a maximum data
transfer speed of 320MB/sec, ensuring high-speed data transfer.
■ Compact Design and Scalability
● Space Saving 1U Design
This server is slim, with a thickness of 1U. The server, display device, keyboard, and external SCSI
options fit in a 19-inch rack, which saves the installation space.
● Maximum Memory Size of 16GB
In addition to the preinstalled 1GB memory, the system has four memory banks for supporting up to
16GB memory.
● Maximum Hard Disk Size of 600GB
Up to two internal hard disk units can be installed in the 3.5-inch storage bays. The hard disk size can be
increased up to 600GB.
● Internal CD-ROM Drive Unit
One optional internal CD-ROM drive unit can be installed.
● Two PCI Slots
The server has two PCI slots including a 64-bit 133MHz PCI-X slot.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2 Supplied Software
ServerStart for supporting setup and high reliability tools for avoiding problems during
server operation are supplied with this server.
1.2.1 Setup Support Tool - ServerStart
ServerStart is a setup support tool that helps to install PRIMERGY.
It offers easy server installation and proper installation of recommended drivers.
■ Installing ServerStart
ServerStart facilitates server setup procedures.
Installing ServerStart
Not using ServerStart
Complicated hardware configuration (RAID configuration, etc.)
User definition, access privileges, network settings
It is necessary to input successively for installation,
resulting in more mistakes and longer time
Install
&
Example:
Setup
Operations such as setting IP address,
creating users, and registering computer
name are required
Using ServerStart
Automatic RAID configuration is possible
Auto installation of recommended drivers (SCSI, LAN,
etc.) enables high reliable installation
High reliability tool can be installed
automatically *1
Auto setup
Example:
Operations during OS installation is automated *2
*1 High reliability tools are software with comprehensive strength for stable
system operation of the server management
*2 Some input (License window, etc.) and media repositioning are excluded
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
● Configuration File (SerStartBatch.ini)
A configuration file stores the server setup and client information configured in ServerStart. To create a
configuration file, use the ServerStart floppy disk supplied with this server. Store only one file on each
floppy disk. Do not set the ServerStart floppy disk to the write-protected state.
You can use any name for the configuration file. However, the file must be installed in the server as
"SerStartBatch.ini". When installing the file, make sure to save it as "SerStartBatch.ini" on the
ServerStart floppy disk.
1
Start up ServerStart, insert the ServerStart floppy disk containing "SerStartBatch.ini", and click [Start] to
install the server.
■ Intuitive User Interface
The intuitive user interface allows you to easily set the necessary information.
● Main Window
When ServerStart is started, the following window appears.
The window and tool bar differ depending on the mode.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
● Tool Bar
In Guided Mode / Expert Mode
Brings you to
the next page.
Brings you to
the previous page.
Changes the size
of icons.
Ends ServerStart.
Brings you to
the main screen.
Brings you up
one tier.
Resets the status
function.
ON/OFF of the tree display is set.
It doesn't support, and never click.
ꢁ
While the wizard is running, do not click the
icons on the tool bar to move to the previous or
next window. To move to a different window, click the [Previous], [Up], or [Next] button at the bottom of
the wizard window.
● Wizard Window
Clicking a wizard displays a wizard window.
Set items in the wizard window. To move to a step in the next wizard window, click the operation button
at the bottom of the window. Clicking [help] displays a tip for setting the item.
■ Network Configuration
ServerStart can configure a network at server installation.
For details on available network patterns, refer to "Using ServerStart to configure the Network".
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Automatic Driver Installation
Recommended drivers for automatically recognized expansion cards are installed with the server. This
prevents possible mistakes in driver installation, such as installation of an older version or drivers which
were not supplied with this server.
1
■ Automatic RAID Configuration
When a disk array is configured using the onboard SCSI array controller, specify the RAID type and the
number of hard disk units before starting installation. A disk array can be configured without starting the
RAID utility.
■ Remote Installation
ServerStart can store resources necessary for installation, such as the OS and Service Pack, a different
server on the network and install the OS via the network. This method is used when the server does not
have a CD-ROM or floppy disk drive.
SystemcastWizard Professional (optional) is a useful tool for extracting a lot of files in a short time.
1.2.2 High Reliability Tools
High reliability tools are a comprehensively useful set of software for stable system operations of the
server. The following tools have respective roles to manage normal operations or recovery from errors:
•
•
•
Server Monitoring Tools
System Diagnosis Support Tools
LAN Driver Advanced Setup Tools
■ Server Monitoring Tools
The server monitoring tools monitor the hardware status on behalf of the administrator and notify him/
her in the event of an error.
● Detecting a Server Failure Early [ServerView]
ServerView is software that monitors whether the server hardware is in a normal state to protect
important server resources. When using ServerView, the server hardware is monitored all the time. If an
error that could cause trouble is detected, the administrator is notified in real-time. This allows the server
administrator to remove a system error early and avoid trouble.
● Detecting a Disk Failure Early [RAID Management Tool]
RAID Management Tool is software that monitors the disk array. RAID Management Tool runs as a
Windows Server 2003/Windows 2000 Server system service. When an event occurs, it leaves an event
log in the event viewer's application logs. At the same time, a pop-up window indicates a hard disk
failure, rebuild status, etc.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
■ System Diagnosis Support Tools
The system diagnosis support tool is for supporting system diagnosis during normal operation or in the
event of trouble.
● Solving Problems Early [DSNAP]
DSNAP is a command line utility that collects all the failure investigation information. System file
configuration information, major registry settings, and event logs can be collected easily from the
command line.
DSNAP is used to allow maintenance personnel to understand your system software configuration and
settings correctly and ensure smooth investigations when a problem occurs in your Windows Server
2003/Windows 2000 Server system. Pass the information along with memory dumps to your
maintenance personnel.
■ LAN Driver Advanced Setup Tools
LAN Driver Advanced Setup Tool sets details on the LAN, including the use of the Teaming function
and VLAN configuration.
®
● Intel PROSet
®
Intel PROSet is a tool for setting details for using the Teaming function or configuring a VLAN.
1.2.3 Installing High Reliability Tools
You can install all high reliability tools provided with PRIMERGY by specifying them in "Application
Wizard" when the OS is installed is initiated with ServerStart.
After manual OS installation, high reliability tools can be installed all at once, just as they are installed
during OS installation with ServerStart.
In each case, the following high reliability tools are installed.
table: High reliability tool installation
Batch
High Reliability Tools
installation with
ServerStart
A *1
S
RAID Management Tool
ServerView
DSNAP
S
Intel® PROSet
A
A: Installed in any case
S: Installed if selected
*1: Installed when an onboard SCSI array controller is used for an array configuration or a RAID card is installed
ꢀ
Linux does not support batch installation with ServerStart.
ꢀ
ServerView must be configured after installation even when the high reliability tools have been
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
1.3 Component Names and Functions
This section explains the component names and functions of the server.
1
1.3.1 Server (Front View)
ghi
j
c
d
o n
m
l
k
a
b
e
f
q
p
a Power supply unit LED
table: Power supply unit status
Power supply unit status
The unit is operating normally.
LED status
Lights green
Lights amber
An AC power supply is connected or an error is
detected in the power supply unit.
b Power supply unit (optional)
c Hard disk access LED (
This LED lights green when data is being written to or read from the hard disk.
d Hard disk failure LED (
)
)
This LED lights or blinks when the internal hard disks configure an array. It does not light or
blink when the OS is not running (during POST).
table: Hard disk status
LED status
Hard disk status
In normal mode or hot spare mode
Error detected in a hard disk
Off
Lights amber
Blinks amber
During initialization or rebuilding
e Floppy disk drive
Writes/reads data to/from a floppy disk.
f CD-ROM drive (optional)
Reads data or programs from a CD-ROM.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
g System identification LED (ID)
This LED is used for maintenance. When pressing this button, the front and rear system
identification LEDs are lit blue so that the locations of devices being maintained can be
determined.
Also, the [System Identification LED Display] button of ServerView can be used to light them.
h Hard disk access display LED (
)
This LED lights green when data is being written to or read from the hard disk. It also lights
when the server is accessing the CD-ROM.
i Reset switch (RST)
Pressing this switch resets and restarts the system.
ꢀ
When the reset switch is pressed, all unsaved data will be lost. Save the data before resetting
the system.
ID
j System identification LED button (
)
When pressing this button, the front and rear system identification LEDs are lit blue so that the
locations of devices being maintained can be determined.
k Power switch ( )
Press this switch to turn the server on.
ꢀ
Do not turn the server off when the hard disk access LED is blinking.
Data in the hard disk may be damaged.
NMI
l Maintenance switch (
)
This switch is used only by maintenance personnel. Do not touch this.
m Front maintenance LED (
)
When the ServerView is installed, this LED lights in amber during the logical drive initialization/
rebuild of the onboard disk array controller. This indicates a normal operation.
This LED also lights or blinks in amber when an error is detected in the server components. If it
lights or blinks except for drive initialization or rebuild, contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
n Power status LED (
)
This LED lights as follows depending on the server power supply status.
table: Power Supply Status
LED status
Power supply status
Power not supplied (power off)
In normal mode (standby mode)
In normal mode (operating mode)
Off
Lights amber
Lights green
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
o USB connector (
)
Connects peripheral equipment conforming to the USB standard (2.0 or 1.1).
p 3.5-inch storage bay
Contains an internal hard disk unit.
1
q Inlet
AC power cables are plugged in.
1.3.2 Server (Rear View)
a
b c d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
a LAN connector A (
)
An Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is plugged in. For 1000Mbps connection, a cable
conforming to category 5 enhanced is required.
The meanings of the two LED are shown in the table below.
table: LAN Status
LED status
Lights green
LED
location
Connection status
Link is being established.
Left
Blinks green
Off
Data is being transferred.
Link is not established.
Right
Lights amber
Lights green
Off
Connection is established at 1000Mbps.
Connection is established at 100Mbps
Connection is established at 10Mbps or
the LAN is not connected.
The left LED may light green when no LAN cable is connected. This is not a failure. When a
LAN cable is connected, the LED operates as shown in the table above. If the LED does not light
or blink though a LAN cable is connected, the server may have a failure.
b LAN connector B (
)
This is a PCI connector. The applicable cable and meanings of the LEDs are the same as those for
LAN connector A.
c Rear maintenance LED (
)
This LED lights amber when the server is not turned on (standby mode). When the server is
turned on and the ServerView is installed, this LED lights amber during the logical drive
initialization/rebuild of the onboard disk array controller. When an error is detected in the server
components while the server is turned on, it also lights or blinks amber.
If this LED lights or blinks except for drive initialization or rebuild while the server is turned on,
contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" section of the "Start Guide".
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
ID
d System identification LED (
)
This LED is used for maintenance. When pressing this button, the front and rear system
identification LEDs are lit blue so that the locations of devices being maintained can be
determined. Also, the [System Identification LED Display] button of ServerView can be used to
light them.
e USB connector (
)
Connects peripheral equipment conforming to the USB standard (2.0 or 1.1).
f Display connector (15 pin) (
)
A display cable is plugged in.
g Serial port (9 pin) (
)
Cables of peripheral equipment conforming to the RS-232C standard such as modems are
plugged in.
h Keyboard connector (6 pin) (
)
A keyboard is plugged in.
i Mouse connector (6 pin) (
)
j Inlet (for optional power supply unit)
AC power cables are plugged in.
k Power supply unit LED
The LED indicates the power supply unit status.The following shows the meanings of the LED.
table: Power supply unit status
LED status
Lights green
Lights amber
Power supply unit status
The unit is operating normally.
An AC power supply is connected or an error is
detected in the power supply unit.
l Power supply unit (standard)
One power supply unit is installed by default. Up to two units can be installed. Adding a power
supply unit enables the redundant power supply function.
m Inlet
AC power cables are plugged in.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
1.3.3 Server (Internal)
a
1
c
b
d
a PCI slot
Contains extension cards that enhance the server functions. Expansion cards with the PCI bus
interface can be installed in the PCI slots.
b Memory slot
Contains memory.
c CPU socket
Install the CPU. One CPU is installed by default. Up to two CPUs can be installed.
d System fan
Contact an listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide" for the system fan
replacement.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
1.3.4 Baseboard
[Rear]
m
a
l
k
j
i
h
g
b
c
f
e
d
[Front]
a Memory slot
Contains memory. One memory bank consists of Slots A and B on this server. Be sure to install a
pair of memory modules.
b CPU socket 0
c CPU socket 1
Install the CPU.
d Fan board connector
e Power supply connector
f IDE connector for CD-ROM drive
An IDE cable for the optional CD-ROM drive is plugged in.
g Floppy disk drive connector
h JP7
i JP9
j SCSI connector
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
k Internal power connector
An internal power supply cable is plugged in when a remote service board is installed.For more
Notes".
l Server control connector
1
A server control cable is plugged in when a remote service board is installed. For more details,
m Card locking frame connector
An expansion card locking frame is installed.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
1.4 Standard Operations
This section explains standard server operations, including how to turn the server on/
off and to insert/remove a floppy disk.
1.4.1 Opening the Rack Door
This section explains how to open the front and rear doors of the 40U standard rack.
Refer to the manual included with the rack for procedures on opening other rack doors.
■ Opening the Front Door
1
Pull the rack handle up.
When the rack is locked, turn the rack key to unlock.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
2
Turn the handle in the direction of the arrow and pull it forward.
1
Turn and then pull
■ Opening the Rear Door
1
Turn the rack key and pull the rack handle up.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
2
Turn the handle in the direction of the arrow and pull it forward.
Turn and then pull
ꢁ
Unless you are inserting/removing media or turning the power on/off, keep the rack door closed. Doing
so blocks electric waves from cell phones, etc.
ꢁ
Do not lose the keys. If the key is lost, contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start
Guide".
1.4.2 Turning On the Server
• Do not move, strike, or shake the server when it is turned on. This can damage
the hard disk in the server and cause data loss.
• Turn the server on when the temperature is in its operating environment range
(10-35°C). For details on the operating environment, refer to "Start Guide" and
"Safety Precautions".
When operating the device outside of this operating environment, the server
may operate improperly, damage data etc.
Furthermore, Fujitsu cannot be held responsible for any related damage,
malfunction, or loss of data, etc.
• The fans rotate at high speed immediately after the server is turned on, but this
is not defective. When the temperature is in the server's operating environment
range (10-35°C), they start to rotate at normal speed later.
• Be sure to wait for 10 seconds or longer after shutdown before turning the
server on.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
1
Open the rack door.
2
3
4
Make sure that the floppy disk drive and CD-ROM drives are empty.
Turn on the display and peripheral devices.
1
Press the power switch on the front of the server.
The power switch lights green. When the power is turned on, the server performs Power On Self
Tests (POST). If any abnormalities are detected by POST, error messages are displayed.
Power switch
The server's
power LED is
lit green
ꢁ
After connecting the power cable, wait for 10 seconds or more before pressing the power switch. The
power may not be turned on properly if the power switch is pressed immediately after the power cable
is connected (the green power LED turns amber). If this occurs, press the power switch again.
If this occurs, the following system event log can be found with Server Management Tools. However,
this is not an error.
MMM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS: 050301FFFF-24 Overcurrent S=LimitExceeded-Asserted
MMM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS: 050300FFFF-24 Overcurrent S=LimitNotExceeded-Asserted
ꢁ
The time to turn on/off the server can be set with the ASR setting (on the [Power On/Off] tab) using
ServerView supplied with this server.
For details, refer to "3.2 Settings for Server Monitoring" in "ServerView User's Guide" on the
PRIMERGY Document & Tool CD (Disc 2).
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
1.4.3 Turning Off the Server
• In the event of smoke or sparks, immediately unplug the electric cord. Failure
to do so may lead to a fire or electrocution.
• When turning off the server, be sure to follow the procedures described in this
section. Data can be lost if these procedures are not followed correctly.
• Be sure to wait for 10 seconds or longer after shutdown before turning the
server on.
Otherwise, the server may not start up properly.
1
2
Make sure that the floppy disk drive and CD-ROM drives are empty.
Shut down the OS.
In the following cases, the server is turned off after the OS is shut down (Step 3 is not necessary).
• Windows OS
• When ServerView is installed
In other cases, shut down the OS and make sure that the floppy disk and hard disk access LEDs
are off.
3
Press the power switch on the front of the server.
The power switch lights amber.
Power switch
The servers
power LED is
lit amber
4
Turn off the display and peripheral devices.
ꢁ
The time to turn on/off the server can be set with the ASR setting (on the [Power On/Off] tab) using
ServerView supplied with this server.
For details, refer to "3.2 Settings for Server Monitoring" in "ServerView User's Guide" on the
PRIMERGY Document & Tool CD (Disc 2).
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Cautions for Turning the Power On/Off (for a Windows OS)
•
For Windows Server 2003
"Do Nothing", "Prompt Input", "Standby", "Hibernation", or "Shutdown" can be specified as the
operating mode of the power switch in the OS settings (normally, "Shutdown" is specified).
For Windows 2000 Server
1
•
"Standby", "Hibernation", or "Power Off" can be specified as the operating mode of the power switch
in the OS settings (normally, "Power Off" is specified).
On this server, functions corresponding to "Standby" and "Hibernation" are supported as BIOS and
hardware functions. However, some drivers and software installed in the server do not support these
functions. For this reason, functions corresponding to "Standby" and "Hibernation" are unavailable on
this server.
When the operating mode is set to "Standby" or "Hibernation", the system may operate improperly or
hard disk data may be corrupted.
For details about operating mode settings, refer to the manual supplied with the OS.
1.4.4 Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk
■ Cautions
When using a floppy disk, note the following points.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not expose the disk to any fluids.
Do not open the shutter of the floppy disk and touch the disk surface.
Do not bend the floppy disk or place heavy objects on it.
Do not expose the floppy disk to strong magnetic fields.
Do not drop the floppy disk on hard surfaces.
Do not store the disk in extremely hot or cold conditions.
Do not put layers of labels on the floppy disk.
Keep the disk away from condensation or water droplets.
■ Inserting the Floppy Disk
1
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive from the shutter side.
When clicking into place, the floppy disk eject button pops out.
Floppy disk
eject button
Shutter
Label side up
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
■ Ejecting the Floppy Disk
1
Make sure that the floppy disk access LED is off. Press the floppy disk eject
button.
The floppy disk is ejected.
Floppy disk
access LED
Floppy disk
eject button
Off
• Do not eject the floppy disk while the floppy disk access LED is on. The data
stored on the floppy disk may be damaged.
1.4.5 Inserting and Ejecting a CD-ROM
This section explains how to insert and eject a CD-ROM.
■ Cautions for Handling CD-ROM Drive
•
Use the drive in a dry place with low airborne dust levels. Entry of water, a paper clip, or other liquids
or metal objects can cause electric shock or failures.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use the drive in a place exposed to shocks or vibration.
Do not insert any object other than the specified CD-ROMs.
Do not pull or push the CD-ROM tray forcibly.
Do not disassemble the CD-ROM drive.
Clean the CD-ROM tray before use. Use a dry, soft cloth for cleaning.
When the CD-ROM drive is not used for a prolonged period, eject the CD-ROM to prevent accidents.
To avoid dust or particles, keep the CD-ROM tray closed (in a loaded position).
This server supports CD-ROMs with the following logo. Do not use CD-ROMs without the logo.
Doing so may cause failures.
•
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Cautions for Handling CD-ROMs
•
When removing the disk from the case, pull the disk up while pressing the center holder of the case as
shown in the figure below.
1
•
•
Hold the CR-ROM on its edge to avoid contact with the disk surface.
Do not contaminate the CD-ROM surface with fingerprints, oil, or dust. If the disk is dirty, wipe it
from the center to the edge with a dry, soft cloth. Do not use benzine, thinner, water, record sprays,
antistatics, or silicone clothes.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Be careful not to scratch the CD-ROM surface.
Avoid heat.
Do not bend the floppy disk or place heavy objects on it.
Do not use a ball-point pen or pencil on the label (printed) side.
Do not apply stickers to the label side. Abnormal vibration can occur due to eccentricity.
When the CD-ROM is moved from a cold place into a warm place, dew condensation may occur,
resulting in data read errors. If this is the case, wipe droplets away with a dry, soft cloth and let the
unit dry naturally. Do not use a hair dryer.
•
•
To avoid dust, scratches, or deformation, store CD-ROMs in the case whenever not in use.
Do not store CD-ROMs in areas of high temperature exposed to direct sunlight for many hours or
near heating appliances.
■ Inserting the CD-ROM
1
Make sure the server is turned on and press the CD-ROM eject button.
The CD-ROM tray comes out a little.
CD-ROM eject button
2
Pull the CD-ROM tray out.
CD-ROM tray
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
3
Place the CD-ROM at the center of the tray.
While supporting the CD-ROM tray, push the tray until it clicks into position.
Label side up
CD-ROM tray
ꢀ
ꢀ
If the CD-ROM is placed improperly when the tray is pushed into the unit, the CD-ROM or the
drive may be damaged.
Be careful not to touch the lens of the CD-ROM drive.
4
Move the tray back.
Push the tray gently until it clicks into position.
CD-ROM unit bezel
ꢀ
Push the center of the CD-ROM unit bezel gently until the tray clicks into position.
■ Ejecting the CD-ROM
the CD-ROM" (ꢁpg.35).
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
1.5 Workflow
Use the following workflow from server installation to start of operation.
1
Installing the server
Referring to "Safety Precautions" and "Start Guide", install the server to a suitable place.
Preparing the server
- Install internal options
- Set hardware
Referring to "2.1 Preparation on the server", "Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options", and
"Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities", prepare the server.
Selecting the installation method
Referring to "2.2 Selecting the Installation Method", decide what installation method to use.
ServerStart, a software that enables everything from OS installation/setup to the installation of high
reliability tools to be performed in one operation, comes with this server. It is recommended that
ServerStart is used to perform installation.
Checking precautions on installation
Before installing the OS, check the precautions on installation by referring to "2.3 Precautions on Installation".
OS installation
Using ServerStart
Manual installation
Referring to "Chapter 3 OS Installation Using
ServerStart", perform OS installation.
Referring to "Chapter 4 Manual OS
Installation", perform OS installation.
Install internal options
Referring to "Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options", install the internal options.
Procedures before operation
Before operating the server, refer to "Chapter 5 Operations after OS installation".
High reliability tool installation
When the OS is installed manually, it is necessary to install high reliability tools. ServerView requires
settings before server operation. For installation method and details about each high reliability tool, refer to
"Chapter 6 High Reliability Tools".
Start operations
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
2.1 Preparation on the Server
Before starting installation, install internal options to the server and perform
necessary hardware settings.
2.1.1 Installing Internal Options
Internal options are classified into those that must be installed before the OS installation and those that
must be installed after the OS installation.
● Internal options that must be Installed before the OS installation
•
•
•
Memory modules
CPU
Expansion cards
● Internal options that must be Installed after the OS installation
•
•
Optional SCSI devices
Internal hard disk units where the Operating System is not installed
ꢁ
If an internal option device that must be installed after the OS installation has been already installed,
remove the device, install the OS, then reinstall the device.
■ Cautions for Installing an Expansion Card
When using an expansion card, read the notes on the expansion card.
■ Cautions for Installing an Optional SCSI Device
When adding an optional SCSI device (DAT, etc.) using a SCSI card, connect it after installing the OS.
Connecting it before OS installation may result in improper drive letter assignment.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Cautions for Installing a Memory Module
This server supports up to 16GB of memory. However, the maximum installable size varies depending
on the OS. Furthermore, since the server uses part of the memory as PCI resources, the maximum
available size is limited.
The following shows the maximum installable size and the maximum available size.
table: Maximum Installable Size and Maximum Available Size
Installed memory
OS
Available memory size
size
3.0GB or smaller
4.0GB
Windows 2000 Server * 1
Same as the installed memory size
Installed memory size - (0.63GB) * 2
2
Windows Server 2003, Standard
Edition * 1
Windows 2000 Advanced Server
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise
Edition
3.0GB or smaller
4.0 to 8.0GB
Same as the installed memory size
Installed memory size - (0.63GB) * 2
* 1: Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition support up to 4GB of memory.
* 2: Because 0.63GB of memory is used as PCI resources, the available memory size varies depending on the
installed card.
● Cautions Applicable When the OS is Windows Server 2003, Enterprise
Edition or Windows 2000 Advanced Server
When installing 4GB or more of memory in a server operating with Windows 2000 Advanced Server or
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition, the /PAE option in the "Boot.ini" file must be described. For
the procedure for editing the "Boot.ini" file, refer to the manual supplied with the OS.
ꢁ
The "Boot.ini" file is an important file for the system. If the file is edited improperly, the system may not
start up. Edit it carefully.
"Boot.ini" file description example
[operating systems]
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)?WINNT="Microsoft
Windows 2000 Advanced Server" /PAE /fastdetect
■ LAN Cable
Be sure to connect the LAN cable when the server is not connected to the Internet. If the OS is installed
or applications are automatically installed without connecting the LAN cable to the LAN card, an error
may be recorded in the event viewer after setup completes.
ꢁ
Connecting to the Internet during setup can cause security problems. Do not connect to the Internet
until the setup completes.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
2.1.2 Hardware Settings
Before starting installation, set necessary hardware, such as the BIOS Setup Utility.
■ BIOS Setup Utility
The BIOS Setup Utility must be set in the following cases. For details on how to set the BIOS Setup
● Changing the Boot Drive
To change the boot drive, start up the BIOS Setup Utility, select [Boot Option], and set the boot drive.
● Performing Remote Installation
Before performing remote installation of ServerStart, use the following procedures to enable network
startup (PXE). In addition, check the MAC address.
1
Take the following steps in the BIOS Setup Utility.
1. Start the BIOS Setup Utility.
2. Select [Boot Options] and press the [Enter] key.
The Boot Options menu window appears.
3. Change [MultiBoot for HDs] to [Enabled].
4. Press the [Esc] key and select the [Advanced] menu.
5. From the [PCI Configuration] submenu, select [Ethernet on Board]. Set the [Option
ROM Scan] item of [PCI Device, Embedded Ethernet 1(LANCN2)] to [Enabled].
6. From the [Exit] menu, select [Save Changes & Exit] to exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
7. Start the BIOS Setup Utility again.
8. Select the [Boot Option] submenu from the [Main] menu. Press the [Enter] key.
The Boot Option submenu window appears.
9. Change the [Boot Sequence] setting as shown below.
1 IBA GE Slot 0330 v****
2 CD-ROM
3 Removable Device
4 Hard Drive
10. Exit the BIOS Setup Utility and turn the server off.
2
Check the MAC address.
After BIOS setup, start up the server from the network.
The MAC address is displayed as shown below.
CLIENT MAC ADDR: XX XX XX XX XX XX
The MAC address is required for remote installation. Write it down.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3
Exit the BIOS Setup Utility and turn off the server.
ꢁ
You can turn the power on/off from a client (via a LAN) by utilizing the Wakeup on LAN (WOL) function.
This function is enabled at the time of purchase. For more details, refer to "5.5.5 Turning the Power
On/Off via a LAN" (ꢀpg.150).
ꢁ
Be sure to install ServerView to control the power supply via a LAN.
2
When ServerView is not installed, the server is not turned off automatically after OS shutdown.
■ SCSI Setup Utility
The SCSI Setup Utility is used for setting the onboard SCSI array controller of this server.
Check or change settings as necessary before installation. Refer to "8.3 SCSI Setup Utility" (ꢀpg.233).
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
2.2 Selecting the Installation Method
When installing the OS for the first time, there are multiple installation methods. Refer
to the following to decide on the method.
ꢁ
To set up multiple servers with the same model and configuration, refer to "3.5 Installation on Multiple
(the Second and Subsequent) Servers" (ꢀpg.104).
Linux
For the use of Linux, refer to the Fujitsu PRIMERGY
website (http://primergy.fujitsu.com).
What OS will you use?
Windows Server 2003
/Windows 2000 Server
Installation is performed manually.
Refer to "4.2 Starting Manual Installation" and
perform installation.
No
Will you use ServerStart?
Yes
When setting setup information in advance on
the client computer, refer to "3.2 Preconfiguration
Mode" and perform installation.
Refer to "3.1 Guided mode" and perform installation.
* If you follow the wizard, setup will be performed
correctly.
■ Installation Using ServerStart
When an OS is installed using ServerStart, the driver for the expansion card that is automatically
recognized will be installed automatically. In addition, high reliability tools and array controller
administrative tools are installed automatically. Installation using ServerStart is recommended.For
■ Installation While Maintaining the Established RAID Environment
In guided mode or preconfiguration mode, select [Use existing array] for [Configuration mode] at
[RAID Wizard] (in the [RAID Configuration] window) and install the OS.
■ Installation Using ServerStart While Maintaining the Existing
Partitions
In expert mode, start up Disk Manager, format the installation partition, and install the OS.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
2.3 Precautions on Installation
Read the following notes before starting OS installation.
2.3.1 Installation Partition Size
2
For installation using ServerStart, the installation partition size can be set as follows, depending on the
OS to be installed and format.
table: Installation Partition Size
Available size
Minimum
Maximum
Windows Server 2003
Windows 2000 Server
2200MB
2TB
2048MB
2TB
● Notes
•
When you want to set the OS and BOOT partitions in different partitions, specify the partition size
directly.
(The BOOT partition is the partition for startup. Minimum information required for startup, such as
"ntldr", is stored.
The OS partition is the partition for installing the OS.
•
•
In either of the following cases, specify a partition size less than 2TB.
• When the same partition is specified as the OS and BOOT partitions
• When different partitions are specified as the OS and BOOT partitions
The OS cannot be installed in a partition larger than 2TB.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
2.3.2 Notes on Configuring RAID
Take the following notes when you configure a RAID system.
■ Hardware Configuration
•
•
•
Only internal hard disk units can be used.
Be sure to use hard disk units of the same model and with the same capacity.
Two hard disk units can be configured for installation. An array configuration cannot be established
with only one unit.
•
The only RAID level configurable with this server is RAID1.
ꢀ
When the OS is installed using ServerStart, only one RAID card can be installed. If you need more
cards, install them after OS installation.
■ Checking before OS Installation
•
When a RAID-configured disk is used
Used hard disk units can contain unnecessary partition or array configuration information that can
cause unforeseeable problems.
Before connecting a used hard disk unit to this server, connect it to a different system and perform
low-level formatting on the hard disk unit.For the low-level formatting procedure, refer to the manual
supplied with the system used for formatting.When performing low-level formatting on a hard disk
Number of disk units
•
If only one hard disk unit is set, installation with ServerStart causes an error and will be aborted.Be
sure to configure two units.
2.3.3 Notes on a Multiple LAN Adapter Configuration
Using the OS installation wizard of ServerStart, you can configure multiple LAN adapters (network
adapters) on the system. However, there are the following limitations.
● Adapter Numbers
To configure multiple LAN cards, select the adapter numbers in order of Adapter 1 and Adapter 2, and
enter settings for each adapter. Note that the order of adapter numbers is not necessarily the same as the
order of slots for the installed LAN adapters. This means that the setting for Adapter 1 is not always
applied to the onboard LAN. After installing the OS, check the LAN adapters to make sure that they are
configured as intended.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
2.3.4 Cautions for Using ServerStart
■ Operating ServerStart
Most ServerStart operations are performed with the mouse. Items may not be moved with the [Tab] key
or cursor keys. Be sure to use the mouse when operating ServerStart.
■ Ejecting the CD-ROM
Do not eject the ServerStart CD-ROM while ServerStart is running. If the ServerStart CD-ROM is
2
ejected and inserted again, ServerStart starts up in multiple windows, and settings you have made can be
lost.
■ Exiting ServerStart
After operation in guided mode or expert mode, exiting ServerStart restarts the system. Ejecting disks
from the floppy disk and CD-ROM drives and click [OK]. When the display on the screen disappears,
turn off the system.
■ License for Use of System for ServerStart
"License for Use of System for ServerStart" linked from the ServerStart startup window is a license for
use of Windows PE contained in the ServerStart CD-ROM. Windows PE for starting up ServerStart can
be only used for installing Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 Server provided under a separate
legal license.
■ Setting Up the Printer
ServerStart does not support setup of printers. Perform installation after setup is completed.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
2.3.5 Expansion Cards Supported by ServerStart
ServerStart supports automatic driver installation for the following expansion cards.
table: Automatic Expansion Card Driver Installation
Name
Model
Bus
Onboard FDD/IDE
Onboard SCSI
Onboard LAN
Onboard VGA
-
-
-
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
-
-
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128 MB w/ BBU
Fibre Channel Controller
LAN cards
PG-142E3
PG-FC106
PG-1852
PG-1862
PG-1882L
PG-1892L
PG-130L
SCSI Ctrl U160 lp
2.3.6 Cautions for Manual Installation
■ Cautions for Configuring a Disk Array with an Onboard SCSI Array
Controller
Disk array configuration on the onboard SCSI array controller must be completed before the OS is
installed. To check the onboard SCSI array controller configuration, start up the SCSI Setup Utility. For
If a disk array is not configured on the onboard SCSI array controller, the normal SCSI configuration is
established.
■ Free Space Required for Installation
The partition where the OS is installed must have enough free space for obtaining memory dump. For
■ Cautions on Restarting
In the course of installation, a message appears to indicate that the setup program restarts. Wait until it
restarts.
For more details on background operations, refer to "PRIMERGY RX200 S2 Onboard SCSI RAID
User's Guide".
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
2.4 Preparation for Using ServerStart
on a Client Computer
When using the preconfiguration mode for setting installation information in advance
or when creating a driver disk using the FloppyBuilder function, install ServerStart on
the client computer.
2
● System Requirements for Client Computers
Client computers must satisfy the following requirements.
Hardware
Personal computers operated with Windows NT, Windows XP Professional, or Windows
2000 Professional
(A CD-ROM drive and 10MB or more of free space are required.)
Software
Microsoft® Internet Explorer 5.5 or later
2.4.1 Installing ServerStart
ꢀ
If a different version of ServerStart has been installed, uninstall it. The FloppyBuilder function or
installation wizard may not operate properly on a different version.
1
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the client computer.
The [ServerStart Launcher] window appears.
When the [ServerStart Launcher] window does not appear, execute "Launcher.exe" in the CD-
ROM.
2
Click [OK].
The Windows installer starts and the Setup window appears.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
3
4
Click [Next].
The [License Agreement] window appears.
Select [I accept the license agreement] and click [Next].
The [User Information] window appears.
ꢀ
The setting for this item cannot be changed.
5
6
Enter the user information of the software and click [Next].
The [Installation Folder] window appears.
Specify the installation folder and click [Next]. To change the installation folder,
click [Browse] and select the folder.
The [Select Features] window appears.
7
Set [ServerStart - remote installation] to "Disable this function" and click [Next].
The [Ready to Install the Application] window appears.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8
Specify whether or not to copy the contents of the CD.
When you select [Yes] for "enable the use of ServerStart without CD.", you can start the
preconfiguration mode on the client computer without using the CD-ROM.
If you select [Yes], specify the target folder. The target folder must have enough free space to
copy the contents of the CD-ROM.
ꢀ
On WindowsNT, the CD-ROM is not copied. You must click [No]. The ServerStart CD-ROM is
required to start ServerStart.
2
9
Click [Next].
Installation is executed.
ꢀ
If a message prompting you to restart the system appears before or after installation, eject the
CD-ROM and restart the system according to the message. When the system restarts, insert
the ServerStart CD-ROM and start installation again.
If the "This program does not respond." message appears during restart operation, click [Exit]
to continue the restart operation.
When the installation is completed, the completion window appears.
10 Click [Exit].
ServerStart has been installed to the client computer.
2.4.2 Uninstalling ServerStart
Perform the following procedure to uninstall ServerStart from the client computer.
1
2
Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
Double-click [Add or Remove Applications] ([Add or Remove Programs] on
some operating systems).
3
Select [Fujitsu ServerStart] and click [Remove] (or [Modify]).
When the uninstallation is executed successfully, Fujitsu ServerStart is deleted.
If [ServerStart - remote installation] has been installed using ServerStart, "FjPXEServer" seems
undeleted. Leave it and complete the operation.
ꢀ
On Windows 2000 Professional clients, "Add or Remove Applications" may become unable to respond
during uninstallation. If this occurs, log off from the system.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.1 Guided Mode
In guided mode, follow the wizard to specify hardware configuration and the OS to be
installed, save the information necessary for installation in a configuration file, and
install the OS.
3.1.1 Starting Up the Guided Mode
Start up the guided mode.
ꢀ
When you do not configure an array but will perform installation to an array-configured server, remove
the array before starting up ServerStart.For the procedure for deleting an array, refer to "8.3.7 RAID
1
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately.
ServerStart starts up and a message appears prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk.
2
Insert the ServerStart floppy disk supplied with the server. Make sure that
"Removable media" and "A:" are selected and click [Create].
ꢀ
Set the ServerStart floppy disk in the write-enabled state.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
The network setting window for remote installation appears.
3
3
Click [OK].
The [Initialization of ServerStart core running] window appears and unattended installation will
be started. Depending on the hardware configurations, this process may take a few minutes.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
When the process is completed, the [Create a ServerStart Floppy Disk] window appears.
4
Click [Build a ServerStart Floppy Disk].
Creation of a ServerStart floppy disk starts.When the creation is completed, the "Floppy disk has
been created." message appears.
5
6
Click [OK].
"Please Select your keyboard" window appears.
Select your keyboard language from the dropdown list and click [OK].
The subsequent start procedure may take several minutes.
The [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
7
Click [Click here to prepare and/or initiate an operating system installation].
The [Select the operating system to be installed] window appears.
Click [Special Hints on Operating System Installation] and read the contents. Important
information such as limitations on disk configuration is described.
8
9
Click [MS Windows Operating Systems].
The [Microsoft Windows Operating System Installation] window appears.
Click the OS to install.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
10 Click [Prepare & initiate an unattended installation of (OS)].
The guided mode for the selected OS starts up.
3
Start up the wizards to set items in the following procedures.
Exiting the wizard returns the display to the guided mode window.
Open/create configuration file
RAID wizard
Disk wizard
(connected disks are displayed)
OS installation wizard
Application wizard
Close/save configuration file
Starting OS installation
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.1.2 Open/create a Configuration File
Open a configuration file. Or create a new file.
1
Click [Start have to create a complete configuration file].
The [Open ServerStart Configuration File] window appears.
ꢀ
Once a configuration file is opened, another file cannot be opened until you click [Close and
save Configuration File].
2
3
Select the configuration file and click [Create].
The [Create] button is changed to the [Continue] button.
Click [Continue].
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.1.3 RAID wizard
Configure RAID.
1
Click [RAID Wizard: Setting for the RAID system].
The [RAID Configuration] window appears.
Only array controllers already installed are displayed.
The number of hard disk units connected to the array controller is displayed.
3
ꢀ
ꢀ
If you open a configuration file that has been created before, displayed settings may differ from
the previously set values. Be sure to check the settings.
When you do not configure RAID, set the configuration mode to "Use existing array" before
exiting the wizard.
2
Set items and click [leave wizard].
The RAID wizard closes.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.1.4 Disk wizard
Create and format hard disk partitions.
ꢀ
The disk wizard starts up with the default settings. Be sure to click [MODIFY] to check the settings.
Change them as necessary.
1
Click [Disk Wizard: Hard disk partitioning and formatting].
The [Disk Overview] window appears.
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the installation disk has partitions, check [Erase all existing partitions on all displayed
disks].
When other disks than the installation disk have an active partition, create a partition on the
disks with an active partition and check [Erase all existing partitions on all displayed disks].
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
2
Add, remove, or modify partitions as necessary.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Partition size of the FAT file system
When "FAT" is selected in [File system] and a value equal to or more than 4095MB or "Auto-
matic setting" is specified in [Partition size], the size of created partitions will be 4095MB.
The following limits apply to the volume label length. A volume label longer than the limit may
be used. However, it can cause installation failure. Enter a volume label within the limit.
•FAT: Up to 11 byte characters
•NTFS: Up to 32 byte characters
Add a partition
1. Click [ADD].
The [Disk Configuration] window appears.
3
2. Set items and click [continue].
The new partition is added to the partition list.
Remove a partition
1. Select the partition to remove and click [REMOVE].
The partition is removed.
Modify the partition configuration
1. Select the partition to modify and click [MODIFY].
The [Disk Configuration] window appears.
2. Change items and click [continue].
The partition is modified.
3
Click [leave wizard] after settings are completed.
The disk wizard closes.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
ꢀ
If you are in guided mode and want to start up the disk wizard again after exiting the wizard, save the
configuration file.
ServerStart may restart when the disk wizard restarts. If this occurs, open the configuration file you
have saved and start setting from the item where you have discontinued. If the configuration file is not
saved, the settings are lost. Start setting again from the beginning.
3.1.5 OS Installation Wizard
Set computer information, user information, and the network protocol.
ServerStart can configure multiple network patterns. When configuring a domain controller, refer to
"Using ServerStart to configure the Network".
ꢀ
The setup window differs depending on the OS to be installed. The following describes operations on
Windows Server 2003.
1
Click [Operating System Wizard: Operating system parameters].
The [Windows Installation] window appears.
2
Enter the password in [Password for Administrator account] and click [Next].
ꢀ
If the password differs between [Password for Administrator account] and [Please repeat Pass-
word], an error dialog window appears. Enter the correct password.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
The [Computer Identification] window appears.
3
3
Set items and click [Next].
The [Installation Directory and Time Zone] window appears.
Set items and click [Next].
The [User Information] window appears.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
4
Set items and click [Next].
The [Display Settings] window appears.
5
Set items and click [Next].
The [Network Protocol] window appears.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
6
Set items and click [Next].
The [Software Components] window appears.
3
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
7
Set items and click [Next].
The [Services] window appears.
8
Set items and click [leave wizard].
The OS installation wizard closes.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.1.6 Application Wizard
Specify installation of supplied applications such as high reliability tools.
1
Click [Application Wizard: Select additional software components].
The application wizard appears.
3
2
3
From the [Installable applications] list, select applications to be installed and
click [>>].
Set all applications to be installed on the [Selected applications] list.
Click [leave wizard].
The application wizard closes.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.1.7 Close/save the Configuration File
When settings in all wizards are completed, save the configuration file.
1
2
Click [Close and save Configuration File].
The [Save ServerStart Configuration File] window appears.
Click [Save As].
The configuration file is saved.
ꢀ
You can specify any name for the configuration file. However, OS installation is possible only
when it is saved as "SerStartBatch.ini". When installing the OS, make sure to save it as "Ser-
StartBatch.ini" on the ServerStart floppy disk.
3.1.8 Starting OS Installation
Install the OS to the server.
During installation, do not use the mouse or keyboard unless it is necessary for installation operations.
Otherwise, installation may fail.
1
Click [Click here, to Start the Installation of (OS)].
The [ServerStart Unattended Mode] window appears.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
2
Click [Start now].
ꢀ
Clicking [Start now] deletes all disk contents and starts installation. Click [Stop] when you do
not perform installation.
After 10 seconds, installation starts automatically.
• When RAID has been configured, the system restarts.
• If a message prompting you to insert the Service Pack CD-ROM appears, insert the CD-ROM
and click [OK].
This message does not appear when Service Pack is not selected.
• If a message prompting you to insert the ServerView CD-ROM appears, insert the
PRIMERGY Document & Tool CD (Disc 1) and click [OK].
This message does not appear when ServerView will not be installed or the PRIMERGY
Document & Tool CD (Disc 1) has been inserted already.
• If a message prompting you to insert the ServerStart CD-ROM appears, insert the CD-ROM
and click [OK].
3
3
When a message prompting you to insert the OS CD-ROM appears, insert the
CD-ROM and click [OK].
After files are copied, a message prompting you to insert the ServerStart CD-ROM appears.
4
5
6
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM and click [OK].
The License Agreement window appears.
Click [I agree].
After files are copied, a message prompting you to eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk appears.
Eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk and click [OK].
Then the system is restarted.
The system continues the installation operation after restart.
OS GUI setup, LAN utility installation, Service Pack installation, and Active Directory
installation are performed automatically.
7
When a confirmation message to restart appears, click [Restart].
The system restarts and installs high reliability tools.
Installation is performed automatically.
8
9
When a message on installation completion appears, press any key.
Restart the system.
Click [Start] → [Shutdown]. Select [Restart] and click [OK].
The system restarts.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
10 When the system restarts, log on to the server using the Administrator account
for the local computer.
The server setup and OS installation have been completed.
before starting server operations.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.2 Preconfiguration Mode
In preconfiguration mode, set and save the information necessary for installation in a
configuration file on a client computer (with a CD-ROM drive and 10MB or more of
free space). Set the saved configuration file on the server for installation.
ꢀ
If ServerStart is not installed in the client computer where the preconfiguration mode is executed, refer
to "2.4 Preparation for Using ServerStart on a Client Computer" (ꢁpg.49) to install ServerStart. If a
different version of ServerStart has been installed, uninstall it and install the proper version. For details
3
ꢀ
If ServerStart is started up on a computer where a different version of ServerStart is installed, the
installation wizard may not operate properly. Make sure to uninstall a different version of ServerStart.
3.2.1 Starting Up the Preconfiguration Mode
Start up the preconfiguration mode.
1
Start up ServerStart.
If ServerStart has already been started, it is not necessary to restart it. If it has not, start it up
according to the following procedures.
When the CD has been copied on Windows 2000 Professional/Windows XP
Professional
1. Click [Start] → [Programs] → [Fujitsu ServerStart] → [ServerStart].
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
When Windows NT is used, or if the CD has not been copied
1. Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the client computer's CD-ROM drive.
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
2
Click [FloppyBuilder].
The [ServerStart FloppyBuilder] window appears.
3
4
Click [ServerStart Status Diskette].
A message prompting you to insert the floppy disk appears.
Insert the ServerStart floppy disk supplied with the server and click [OK].
ꢀ
Set the ServerStart floppy disk in the write-enabled state.
Creation of a ServerStart floppy disk starts. When the creation is completed, the "Floppy disk has
been created." message appears.
5
6
Click [OK].
Click [
(HOME)] on the tool bar.
The display returns to the [Welcome to ServerStart] window.
7
Click [Click here to prepare an operating system installation for a PRIMERGY
Server].
The [Prepare the installation of an operating system for PRIMERGY Servers] window appears.
ꢀ
Before starting installation, click [Cautions for Installation] and read the contents. Important
information such as limitations on disk configuration is described.
8
Click [Creation of a ServerStart Configuration file for the installation of an
Microsoft Windows Operating System].
The [Microsoft Windows Operating System Installation] window appears.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
9
Select the OS to install.
The [Preparing the Installation] window appears.
3
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.2.2 Configure Settings in Wizards
Click the wizards to set items in the following procedures. For setting procedures, refer to description on
guided mode wizards ("3.1.2 Open/create a Configuration File" (ꢁpg.58) to "3.1.6 Application Wizard"
(ꢁpg.67)).
Exiting a wizard returns the display to the preconfiguration mode window.
Open/create configuration file
RAID wizard
Disk wizard
OS installation wizard
Application wizard
Close/save configuration file
Activate ServerStart in the server
Starting OS installation
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.2.3 Close/save the Configuration File
When settings in all wizards are completed, save the configuration file.
1
2
Click [Close and save Configuration File].
The [Save ServerStart Configuration File] window appears.
Click [Save As].
The [ServerStart Remote Installation IP Settings] window appears.
3
3
4
Set items when performing remote installation.
Click [Set].
The configuration file is saved.
ꢀ
You can specify any name for the configuration file. However, OS installation is possible only when it is
saved as "SerStartBatch.ini". When installing the OS, make sure to save it as "SerStartBatch.ini" on
the ServerStart floppy disk.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.2.4 Starting OS Installation
Install the OS to the server using the created configuration file.
During installation, do not use the mouse or keyboard unless it is necessary for installation operations.
Otherwise, installation may fail.
ꢀ
When you do not configure an array but will perform installation to an array-configured server, remove
the array before starting up ServerStart. For the procedure for deleting an array, refer to "8.3.7 RAID
Properties Submenu" (ꢁpg.242).
1
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately.
A message prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk appears.
2
Insert the ServerStart floppy disk containing the created configuration file and
click [OK].
ꢀ
Set the ServerStart floppy disk in the write-enabled state. If it is write protected, installation will
fail.
The [Initializing of ServerStart] window appears and unattended installation will be started.
Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few minutes. When the
process is completed, the [ServerStart Unattended Mode] window appears.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3
Click [Start].
Installation starts.
• When RAID has been configured, the system restarts.
• If a message prompting you to insert the Service Pack CD-ROM appears, insert the CD-ROM
and click [OK].
This message does not appear when Service Pack is not selected.
• If a message prompting you to insert the ServerView CD-ROM appears, insert the
PRIMERGY Document & Tool CD (Disc 1) and click [OK]. This message does not appear
when ServerView will not be installed or the PRIMERGY Document & Tool CD (Disc 1) has
been inserted already.
• If a message prompting you to insert the ServerStart CD-ROM appears, insert the CD-ROM
and click [OK].
4
When a message prompting you to insert the OS CD-ROM appears, insert the
CD-ROM and click [OK].
3
After files are copied, a message prompting you to insert the ServerStart CD-ROM appears.
5
6
7
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM and click [OK].
The License Agreement window appears.
Click [I agree].
After files are copied, a message prompting you to eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk appears.
Eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk and click [OK].
The system restarts. The system continues the installation operation after restart. OS GUI setup,
LAN utility installation, Service Pack installation, and Active Directory installation are
performed automatically.
8
9
When a confirmation message to restart appears, click [Restart].
The system restarts and installs high reliability tools. Installation is performed automatically.
When a message on installation completion appears, press any key.
10 Restart the system.
Click [Start] → [Shutdown]. Select [Restart] and click [OK]. The system restarts.
11 When the system restarts, log on to the server using the Administrator account
for the local computer.
The server setup and OS installation have been completed. Refer to "Chapter 5 Operations after OS
Installation" (ꢁpg.127) and perform necessary procedures before starting server operations.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.3 Expert Mode
In expert mode, start up Disk Manager, format the installation partition, and install the
OS.
Use the expert mode only when you want to perform installation while maintaining the
existing partitions. Use the guided mode for normal installation.
3.3.1 Starting Up the Expert Mode
Start up the expert mode.
1
2
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately.
ServerStart starts up and a message appears prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk.
Insert the ServerStart floppy disk supplied with the server. Make sure that
"Removable media" and "A:" are selected and click [Create].
The network setting window for remote installation appears.
ꢀ
Set the ServerStart floppy disk in the write-enabled state.
3
4
Click [OK].
The [Initialization of ServerStart core running] window appears and unattended installation will
be started. Depending on the hardware configurations, this process may take a few minutes.
When the process is completed, the [Create a ServerStart Floppy Disk] window appears.
Click [Build a ServerStart Floppy Disk].
Creation of a ServerStart floppy disk starts.When the creation is completed, the "Floppy disk has
been created." message appears.
5
6
Click [OK].
"Please Select your keyboard" window appears.
Select your keyboard language from the dropdown list and click [OK].
The subsequent start procedure may take several minutes.
The [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
7
Click [Click here to prepare and/or initiate an operating system installation].
The [Select the operating system to be installed] window appears.
Click [Special Hints on Operating System Installation] and read the contents. Important
information such as limitations on disk configuration is described.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8
9
Click [MS Windows Operating Systems].
The [Microsoft Windows Operating System Installation] window appears.
Select the OS to install.
10 Click [Install MS Window Server 2003 interactively (expertise required)].
The expert mode starts.
3
Start up the configuration tools to set items in the following procedures. Exiting a tool returns to
the display to the expert mode window.
Disk manager
OS installation wizard
Application wizard
Starting OS installation
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.3.2 Disk Manager
Start up Disk Manager and format the installation partition.
1
Click [Use Disk Manager to partition and format your disk drives].
Disk Manager starts up.
2
Format the OS installation partition. Select the OS installation partition and click
the [Partition] menu → [Format].
The [Format Partition] window appears.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Be sure to specify the active partition on drive C.
Partitions equal to or larger than 4096MB cannot be FAT formatted.
3
4
Set items and click [Format].
The partition is formatted.
When the formatting is completed, click the [File] menu → [Exit].
Disk Manager closes and the display returns to the expert mode window.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.3.3 OS Installation Wizard
Set computer information, user information, and the network protocol.
ServerStart can configure multiple network patterns. When configuring a domain controller, refer to
"Using ServerStart to configure the Network".
ꢀ
The setting window differs depending on the OS to be installed. The following describes operations on
Windows Server 2003.
1
Click [Installation Wizard for MS Windows Server 2003].
A message prompting you to specify the configuration file appears.
3
2
3
Click [No].
The [Windows Installation] window appears.
Enter the password in [Password for Administrator account] and click [Next].
ꢀ
If the password differs between [Password for Administrator account] and [Please repeat Pass-
word], an error dialog window appears. Enter the correct password.
The [Computer Identification] window appears.
4
5
6
7
8
9
Set items and click [Next].
The [Installation Directory and Time Zone] window appears.
Set items and click [Next].
The [User Information] window appears.
Set items and click [Next].
The [Display Settings] window appears.
Set items and click [Next].
The [Network Protocol] window appears.
Set items and click [Next].
The [Software Components] window appears.
Set items and click [Next].
The [Services] window appears.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
10 Set items and click [leave wizard].
The display returns to the expert mode window.
3.3.4 Application Wizard
Specify installation of supplied applications such as high reliability tools.
3.3.5 Starting OS Installation
Install the OS to the server.
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the installation partition is not empty, a confirmation message appears. If it does not matter, click
[OK] to continue the installation procedure.
If an incorrect setting (such as the CD key) is found during installation, an error window will appear.
Enter the correct value in the window to continue the installation procedure. However, corrections
made here are not reflected to the configuration file.
1
Click [Click here, to Start the Installation of (OS)].
A confirmation window asking whether you want to save the current settings appears.
2
Click [Yes].
The following window appears.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3
Enter the file name and click [Save As].
Installation starts automatically.
3
• If a message prompting you to insert the Service Pack CD-ROM appears, insert the CD-ROM
and click [OK].
This message does not appear when Service Pack is not selected.
• If a message prompting you to insert the ServerView CD-ROM appears, insert the
PRIMERGY Document & Tool CD (Disc 1) and click [OK]. This message does not appear
when ServerView will not be installed or the PRIMERGY Document & Tool CD (Disc 1) has
been inserted already.
• If a message prompting you to insert the ServerStart CD-ROM appears, insert the CD-ROM
and click [OK].
4
When a message prompting you to insert the OS CD-ROM appears, insert the
CD-ROM and click [OK].
After files are copied, a message prompting you to insert the ServerStart CD-ROM appears.
5
6
7
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM and click [OK].
The License Agreement window appears.
Click [I agree].
After files are copied, a message prompting you to eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk appears.
Eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk and click [OK].
Then the system is restarted.
The system continues the installation operation after restart.
OS GUI setup, LAN utility installation, Service Pack installation, and Active Directory
installation are performed automatically.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
8
9
When a confirmation message to restart appears, click [Restart].
The system restarts and installs high reliability tools.
Installation is performed automatically.
When a message on installation completion appears, press any key.
10 Restart the system.
Click [Start] → [Shutdown]. Select [Restart] and click [OK].
The system restarts.
11 When the system restarts, log on to the server using the Administrator account
for the local computer.
The server setup and OS installation have been completed.
before starting server operations.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.4 Remote Installation
ServerStart supports remote installation.
ꢀ
Before performing remote installation, be sure to read "Cautions for Remote Installation" in the online
help.
3.4.1 Overview of Remote Installation
Remote installation is a method to save resources necessary for installation, such as the OS and Service
Pack, in a different server on the network and install them via the network.
If a remote resource server is configured, you can install the same resources to multiple servers. This
method is useful in configuring multiple servers.
3
● Target Server and Remote Resource Server/PXE Server
A server to which resources are installed is called a "target server". A server that stores resources
necessary for remote installation is called a "remote resource server". A server that can start up a target
server through network startup (PXE) is called a "PXE server".
■ Installation Method
Remote installation uses a PXE or a remote resource server.
● Remote Installation Using a PXE Server
In remote installation using a PXE server, the network startup (PXE) function of the PXE server starts
up the target server and performs installation in preconfiguration mode. This method is used when the
target server does not have a CD-ROM or floppy disk drive.
Installation
using ServerStart
Activated by IP address/
boot image
1)
- OS
- Service Pack
- Application
etc.
2) Request resources
Target server
3) Supply resources
PXE server
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
In addition to the PXE server, a "remote resource server" that stores remote resources and a "DHCP
server" that performs the DHCP service are required for remote installation using a PXE server. When
you have only one server, store remote resources on the PXE server to install the DHCP service. When
you have multiple servers, select one for performing the DHCP service and another for storing remote
resources.
● Remote Installation Using a Remote Resource Server
In remote installation using a remote resource server, ServerStart starts up on the target server.
Procedures for starting installation are the same as those in normal installation (preconfiguration mode,
guided mode, and expert mode). Once installation started, resources necessary for installation are
provided from the remote resource server. Thus, procedures such as inserting a CR-ROM are not
necessary.
Activate ServerStart
and start installation
- OS
1) Request resources
- Service Pack
- Application
etc.
Target server
Remote resource server
2) Supply resources
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.4.2 System Requirements for Remote Resource/PXE
Servers
Because remote installation is performed via a network, the environment must have at least one
Windows server and a local area network.
In addition, the following environment is required.
■ Remote Resource/PXE Server Requirements
table: System Requirements for Remote Resource/PXE Servers
PXE server
Remote resource server
OS
Windows 2000 Server SP2 - SP4
Windows Server 2003
Windows 2000 Server
Windows NT Server 4.0
3
Memory
256MB or more
256MB or more
Operating
environment
• DHCP server function (required on the same
network)
• File sharing function (required)
• File sharing function (required)
Notes on the PXE server
ꢀ
ꢀ
Check that no other PXE server exists on the same LAN.
Servers installed with software with the PXE function such as SystemcastWizard/SystemcastWizard
Professional, Quick Recovery Manager, or the Microsoft RIS function cannot be used as a PXE server.
■ Checking Server Free Space
Decide a server to use as a remote resource server / PXE server and check it for enough free space for
storing resources.
● Checking the Number of Servers
•
•
When you have only one server, use it as the remote resource server, PXE server, and DHCP service
server. Check it for the required amount of free space.
When you have multiple servers
• Check if a server performing the DHCP service exists. If not, decide a server for the DHCP
service.
• When there are multiple resources, they can be divided and stored in multiple remote resource
servers.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
● Checking Server Free Space
The following table shows the amount of free space required for each installation resource.
table: Free Space Required for Resources
Resource
Required free space
About 650MB
644MB
ServerStart
Windows Server 2003
472MB
Windows 2000 Server
433MB
Windows 2000 Service Pack 4
Calculate the total resource size. Check that the remote resource server / PXE server has enough free
space (free space greater than the space required for the resources). When the amount of free space is
insufficient, you must use more remote resource servers.
3.4.3 Preparation of the PXE Server (When the PXE Server
is Used)
When performing remote installation using a PXE server, preparatory procedures, such as installing
ServerStart, are required.
Perform the following procedures to prepare the PXE server.
Starting the DHCP Service
Installing ServerStart
Checking Services
Setting TFTP
Preparation of Resources
■ Starting the DHCP Service
Check that the DHCP service is running on the same network.
If the DHCP service function is not installed, perform the following procedures (for Windows Server
2003) to install the DHCP service.
1
Click [Start] → [Control Panel] → [Add or Remove Applications].
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
2
3
Click [Add or Remove Windows Components]. Click the [Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP)] service from [Network Services].
The DHCP service is installed.
Create and configure a DHCP scope so that the IP address can be distributed.
■ Installing ServerStart
1
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the PXE server.
The [ServerStart Launcher] window appears.
When the [ServerStart Launcher] window does not appear, execute "Launcher.exe" in the CD-
ROM.
3
2
3
4
5
Click [OK].
The Windows installer starts and the Setup window appears.
Click [Next].
The [License Agreement] window appears.
Select [I accept the license agreement] and click [Next].
The [User Information] window appears.
Enter the user information of the software and click [Next].
The [Installation Folder] window appears.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
6
Select the installation folder and click [Next].
To change the installation folder, click [Browse] and select the folder.
The [Select Features] window appears.
Configure [ServerStart - remote installation] so that it will be installed.
Clicking [Disk Cost] displays the following widow where you can check the amount of free
space.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
7
Click [Next].
The [contents tree] window appears.
3
8
Configure the ServerStart image necessary for network startup (PXE) and click
[Next].
The [User account for access to the content tree] window appears.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
9
Specify the user account for the content tree and click [Next].
The [PXE Server] window appears.
10 Select [yes] when the PXE server performs the DHCP service or select [no]
when the DHCP and PXE servers are configured separately. Then click [Next].
The [PXE Server] window appears.
11 When there are multiple LAN ports, click [Select], select the LAN controller on
the LAN controller selection screen, and click [Next].
The [Important hint] window appears.
12 Click [Next].
The [Ready to Install the Application] window appears.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
13 Click [Show Readme file].
The [Readme] window appears. Read the text. When you finish, click [ ] in the upper-right
corner of the window to close the [Readme] window.
14 Click [Next].
The image file is copied.
The image file copying process takes about 10 to 20 minutes.
The installation completes when the installation completion window appears.
15 Click [Start] → [Shutdown]. Select [Restart] and click [OK].
The system restarts.
■ Checking Services
3
● Checking [PXE Services] and [TFTP Service]
1
2
Right-click the [My Computer] icon and click [Manage].
Select [Services] from [Services and Applications].
On the Services list, check that PXE Services and TFTP Service have been installed and started.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
● Checking the DHCP Service
Perform the following check only when the PXE server performs the DHCP service.
1
2
On the PXE server, click [Start] → [Programs] → [Administrative Tools] →
[DHCP] to start up the DHCP administrative tool.
Click [Server Options] and check that the "060 ClassID" server option is added.
■ Setting TFTP
TFTP is an FTP service function that requires no authentication. In remote installation, the TFTP service
is used to distribute the boot image required for startup.
For the TFTP path, set the appropriate access rights for the Guest account to obtain the image via
network startup (PXE).
1
Click [Start] → [Programs] → [Accessories] → [Windows Explorer] and move to
the TFTP path (the default is C:\Program
Files\FujitsuSiemens\DeploymentService\tftp).
2
Right-click the TFTP folder and click [Properties].
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3
Click the [Security] tab, add the Guest account, and set the "Read & Execute",
"List Folder Contents", and "Read" access permissions.
3
The preparation of the PXE server has been completed.
3.4.4 Preparation of Remote Resources
Store resources to be installed on the remote resource server (PXE server) before starting installation.
ꢁ
For sharing resources, log on to the remote resource/PXE server with the Administrator account.
1
Prepare resources required for installation.
• CD-ROM for the OS to be installed
• Service Pack CD-ROM for the OS to be installed
• ServerStart floppy disk
• PRIMERGY Document & Tool CD (Disc 1) (for installing ServerView)
• Others
2
3
Create a shared folder for storing resources.
Create a shared folder for each CD prepared in Step 1.
E.g.: E:\W2K3Sv for Windows Server 2003
Extract the resources.
Using Windows Explorer, copy the CD-ROM for the resource to the shared folder.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.4.5 Starting Remote Installation Using a PXE Server
Perform remote installation using a PXE server in the following procedures.
Checking the Network Startup (PXE) Setting
Checking the MAC Address
Creating a Configuration File
(Setting of remote installation)
Starting Installation
■ Checking the Network Startup (PXE) Setting
Remote installation using a PXE server is performed via the onboard LAN. Enable the network startup
(PXE) of the target server.
■ Checking the MAC Address of the Onboard LAN
In remote installation, target servers are identified according to the MAC address. MAC addresses are
unique information to LAN cards. Check the MAC address on each target server. Write down the MAC
address of the onboard LAN. For details on how to check the MAC address of an onboard LAN, refer to
■ Creating a Configuration File
You can create a configuration file on a client computer before starting installation. For the procedure,
Wizards" (ꢀpg.74).
When creating a configuration file on the PXE server, start installation.
ꢁ
Specify the shared name prepared instead of the local CD-ROM as installation information.
■ Starting Installation
1
On the PXE server, start up ServerStart.
If ServerStart has already been started, it is not necessary to restart it.
If it is not started, click [Start] → [Programs] → [Fujitsu ServerStart] → [ServerStart].
The [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
2
3
4
Click [Click here to prepare an operating system installation for a PRIMERGY
Server].
The [Prepare the installation of an operating system for PRIMERGY Servers] window appears.
Click [Creation of a ServerStart Configuration file for the installation of an
Microsoft Windows Operating System].
The [Microsoft Windows Operating System Installation] window appears.
Click the OS to install.
The [Preparing the Installation] window appears.
If a configuration file has already been created, go to Step 6.
3
5
6
Set items in wizards to create a configuration file.
configuration file.
Exiting a wizard returns to the preconfiguration mode window.
Click [Click have to initiate the Remote Installation Process].
The [Configure Remote Installation Target Server] window appears.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
7
Configure remote installation.
1. Enter the "MAC address of the target system".
2. Select the "PRIMERGY model type".
3. Specify the "Configuration file" containing the installation settings.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8
Click [Start Installation].
Installation starts. All disk contents on the target server are deleted.
The [ServerStart Boot Manager] window appears.
Check that the status is "Waiting for client".
3
9
Turn on the target server.
It is started up via the network (PXE) and installation starts.
When the resources have been copied, the "Preparation for automatic OS installation has
completed." message appears.
Subsequent installation is performed automatically.
When the installation is completed, an installation completion message appears on the target
server.
10 Press any key on the target server.
11 Restart the system on the target server.
The server setup and OS installation have been completed.
before starting server operations.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.4.6 Starting Remote Installation Using a Remote
Resource Server
In remote installation using a remote resource server, installation is performed using shared resources on
the remote resource server.
■ Configuring a Remote Floppy
A remote floppy is a shared folder for storing and using a configuration file on the network, instead of
loading it from the ServerStart floppy disk. When the server does not have a floppy disk drive and
installation is performed in guided mode / expert mode, use a remote floppy.
1
2
Create a new folder in the shared folder on the remote resource server.
E.g.: C:\export\ServerStart\Floppy
Create a "ServerStart Floppy Disk" tag file for the ServerStart floppy disk. Start
up Command Prompt and enter the following command.
C:\>copy nul C:\export\ServerStart\Floppy\"ServerStart Floppy Disk"
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Checking Remote Resources
Check that the remote resource server is shared properly.
1
Start up "Command Prompt" on the remote resource server. Enter the following
and press the [Enter] key.
prompt:>net share
Check that the created shared folder is displayed properly.
For the net command, refer to Windows Help.
■ Starting Installation
Start installation from the target server.
● In Guided Mode / Expert Mode
3
1
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately.
ServerStart starts up and a message appears prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk.
2
Create a ServerStart floppy disk.
When the ServerStart floppy disk supplied with the server is used
1. Insert the ServerStart floppy disk supplied with the server. Make sure that
"Removable media" and "A:" are selected and click [Create].
The network startup setting window for remote installation appears.
2. Click [OK].
The [Initialization of ServerStart core running] window appears and unattended installation
will be started. Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few
minutes. When the process is completed, the [Create a ServerStart Floppy Disk] window
appears.
3. Click [Build a ServerStart Floppy Disk].
Creation of a ServerStart floppy disk starts.When the creation is completed, the "Floppy
disk has been created." message appears.
When the remote floppy is used
1. Select "Remote (media)" and click [OK].
The [Network Startup Setting] window for remote installation appears.
2. Click [OK].
The [Specify Drive] window appears.
3. Enter [Remote path], [User name], and [Password] and click [OK].
The [Initialization of ServerStart core running] window appears and unattended installation
will be started. Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few
minutes. When the process is completed, the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
3
Click [Click here to prepare and/or initiate an operating system installation].
The [Select the operating system to be installed] window appears.
Click [Special Hints on Operating System Installation] and read the contents. Important
information such as limitations on disk configuration is described.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
4
Click [MS Windows Operating Systems].
The [Microsoft Windows Operating System Installation] window appears.
5
6
Select the OS to install and the mode.
Set items in wizards and save the configuration file.
Set items in wizards and save the configuration file. When using the remote floppy, specify the
path to the shared folder for the remote floppy as the configuration file saving location.
ꢁ
Specify the shared name of the prepared shared folder instead of the local CD-ROM as instal-
lation source information.
7
8
9
Click [Click here, to Start the Installation of (OS)].
Installation starts. At steps where the CD-ROM for resources such as the OS to be installed is
necessary, the resource is automatically acquired from the resource server via the network.
Eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk and click [OK].
The system restarts. When the installation is completed, an installation completion message
appears on the target server.
Press any key on the target server.
10 Restart the system on the target server.
The server setup and OS installation have been completed.
before starting server operations.
● In Preconfiguration Mode
1
Create a configuration file.
ꢁ
Specify the shared name of the prepared shared folder instead of the local CD-ROM as instal-
lation source information.
2
3
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately.
ServerStart starts up and a message appears prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk.
Set the created configuration file and click [OK].
The [Initializing of ServerStart] window appears and unattended installation will be started.
Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few minutes. When the
process is completed, the [ServerStart Unattended Mode] window appears.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
4
5
Click [Start].
Installation starts. At steps where the CD-ROM for resources such as the OS to be installed is
necessary, the resource is automatically acquired from the resource server via the network.
Eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk and click [OK].
The system restarts. When the installation is completed, an installation completion message
appears on the target server.
6
7
Press any key on the target server.
Restart the system on the target server.
The server setup and OS installation have been completed.
before starting server operations.
3
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.5 Installation on Multiple (the
Second and Subsequent) Servers
This chapter explains how to perform installation on multiple servers using
ServerStart.
By editing the configuration file created for installation on the first server, you can use
it for installation on other servers of the same model and configuration. This reduces
the setup time. However, installation on the first server must be performed using
ServerStart in guided mode or preconfiguration mode.
ꢁ
Check that ServerStart supplied with the first server is of the same version as that supplied with the
other servers. If the version is different, this installation method will not work.
3.5.1 Preparation for Installation
■ Required Software
The following software is required for installation on the second and subsequent servers. Be sure to have
these items close at hand.
•
•
•
CD-ROM for the OS to be installed
ServerStart CD-ROM
ServerStart floppy disk
A: ServerStart floppy disk containing the configuration file used for installation on the first server
B: ServerStart floppy disks supplied with the ServerStart CD-ROMs for the second and subsequent
servers
If ServerStart floppy disks are not supplied, prepare as many floppy disks as there are servers.
PRIMERGY Document & Tool CD (Disc 1) (for installing ServerView)
Service Pack CD-ROM for the OS to be installed
•
•
■ Preparatory Procedure
Perform the following procedure before installation.
Using Explorer or Command Prompt, copy the ServerStart floppy disk (A) to the ServerStart floppy disk
(B).
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.5.2 Installation in Guided Mode
Edit the configuration file and perform installation in guided mode.
1
2
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately.
ServerStart starts up and a message appears prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk.
Insert the ServerStart floppy disk copied in the preparatory procedure into the
floppy disk drive and click [Create].
The network setting window for remote installation appears.
3
Click [OK].
The [Initialization of ServerStart core running] window appears and unattended installation will
be started. Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few minutes. When
the process is completed, the [Create a ServerStart Floppy Disk] window appears.
3
4
5
6
Click [or Insert a ServerStart Floppy Disk to Start ServerStart].
The [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
Click [Click here to prepare and/or initiate an operating system installation].
The [Select the operating system to be installed] window appears.
Click [MS Windows Operating Systems].
The [Microsoft Windows Operating System Installation] window appears.
7
8
Click the OS to install.
Click [Prepare & initiate an unattended installation of (OS)].
The guided mode starts.
9
Click [Start have to create a complete configuration file].
The [Open ServerStart Configuration File] window appears.
10 Specify "SerStartBatch.ini" on drive A and click [Create].
The display returns to the guided mode window.
For procedures from setting wizards to completion of installation, refer to "3.1 Guided Mode"
(ꢀpg.54).
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
Settings values in wizards
ꢁ
Setting items in wizards are set to the values set on the first server. For installation on subse-
quent servers, you must change the following items in the "OS installation wizard". For other
items, change the settings as necessary. You do not need to start up wizards where no settings
will be changed.
table: Settings to be Changed for Installation on Subsequent Servers
Window
name
Setting item name
Remarks
User
Information
Computer name
The setting must be changed when the second
and subsequent servers are on the same
network as the first server.
Product ID/CD key
IP address
The setting must be changed.
Network
Protocol
The setting must be changed when the second
and subsequent servers are on the same
network as the first server.
ꢁ
If the settings for the first server are not reflected to wizards, perform the procedures from
copying the floppy disk over again.
3.5.3 Installation in Preconfiguration Mode
Edit the configuration file and perform installation in preconfiguration mode.
If ServerStart is not installed in the client computer where the preconfiguration mode is executed, refer
to "2.4 Preparation for Using ServerStart on a Client Computer" (ꢀpg.49) to install ServerStart. If a
different version of ServerStart has been installed, uninstall it and install the proper version. For details
ꢁ
ServerStart starts up when it is installed. However, be sure to follow these installation procedures.
contents of the ServerStart floppy disk, making the disk unavailable for installation on multiple servers.
1
Start up ServerStart.
If ServerStart has already been started, it is not necessary to restart it. If it has not, start it up
according to the following procedures.
When the CD has been copiedon Windows 2000 Professional/Windows XP
Professional
1. Click [Start] → [Programs] → [Fujitsu ServerStart] → [ServerStart].
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
When Windows NT is used, or if the CD has not been copied
1. Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the client computer's CD-ROM drive.
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
2
Select the OS to install.
The preconfiguration mode starts up.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3
4
Insert the ServerStart floppy disk copied in the preparatory procedure into the
floppy disk drive and click [Start here to configuration file].
The [Open ServerStart Configuration File] window appears.
Specify "SerStartBatch.ini" on drive A and click [Create].
The display returns to the preconfiguration mode window.
For procedures from setting wizards to completion of installation, refer to "3.2 Preconfiguration
Mode" (ꢀpg.71).
Settings values in wizards
ꢁ
Setting items in wizards are set to the values set on the first server. For installation on subse-
quent servers, you must change the following items in the "OS installation wizard". For other
items, change the settings as necessary. You do not need to start up wizards where no settings
will be changed.
3
table: Settings to be Changed for Installation on Subsequent Servers
Window
name
Setting item name
Remarks
User
Information
Computer name
The setting must be changed when the second
and subsequent servers are on the same
network as the first server.
Product ID/CD key
IP address
The setting must be changed.
Network
Protocol
The setting must be changed when the second
and subsequent servers are on the same
network as the first server.
ꢁ
If the settings for the first server are not reflected to wizards, perform the procedures from
copying the floppy disk over again.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
4.1 Creating Driver Disks
When installing the OS manually, it is necessary to create driver installation disks
beforehand. Also, driver disks must be created when you add an expansion card
during server operation.
■ Preparation for Creating Driver Disks
You need floppy disks for driver disks. A floppy disk is necessary for each driver.
Driver disks are created using the ServerStart FloppyBuilder function. The FloppyBuilder function is
available in the following environments.
•
•
Starting up the ServerStart system on a client computer (Recommended)
Starting up the system from the ServerStart CD-ROM on the server
ꢀ
When creating driver disks on a client computer, it is necessary to install ServerStart on the client
computer beforehand. Install it according to "2.4 Preparation for Using ServerStart on a Client
Computer" (ꢁpg.49).
If a different version of ServerStart has been installed, uninstall it and install the proper version. For
ꢀ
The FloppyBuilder function may not operate correctly if you start up ServerStart while ServerStart of a
different version is installed in the computer. Make sure to uninstall a different version of ServerStart.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
4.1.1 Required Driver Disks
The driver disks to be created differ depending on the OS to be installed.
■ For Windows Server 2003
table: Drivers Required for Installing Windows Server 2003
Expansion card / onboard controller
Chipset
Driver
Intel Chipset E7520 Ver6.2.0.1005
Standard driver provided with the OS
Graphic controller
Onboard SCSI array controller
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 Onboard SCSI Driver Windows 2003
Drivers Disk V1.0L10 *1
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128 MB w/ BBU
(PG-142E3)
PG-142E3 Driver Windows 2000/2003 Drivers Disk V3.0L10 *1
Standard driver provided with the OS
SCSI Ctrl U160 lp (PG-130L)
Onboard LAN
PG-1852/1862/188x/189x LAN Driver for Windows 2003
Ver8.3 *1
LAN card (PG-1852/PG-1862/
PG-1882L/PG-1892L)
PG-FC106 Windows 2000/2003 Drivers Disk V5.10a10 *1
Driver supplied with the expansion card
4
Fibre Channel Controller (PG-FC106)
Other expansion cards
*1: Created from the ServerStart CD-ROM
■ For Windows 2000 Server
table: Drivers Required for Installing Windows 2000 Server
Expansion card / onboard controller
Chipset
Driver
Intel Chipset E7520 Ver6.2.0.1005
Graphic controller
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 Onboard VGA Driver
Ver5.0.2195.5005
Onboard SCSI array controller
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 Onboard SCSI Driver Windows 2000
Drivers Disk V1.0L10 *1
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128 MB w/ BBU
(PG-142E3)
PG-142E3 Driver Windows 2000/2003 Drivers Disk V3.0L10 *1
Standard driver provided with the OS
SCSI Ctrl U160 lp (PG-130L)
Onboard LAN
PG-1852/1862/188x/189x LAN Driver for Windows 2000
Ver8.3 *1
LAN card (PG-1852/PG-1862/
PG-1882L/PG-1892L)
PG-FC106 Windows 2000/2003 Drivers Disk V5.10a10 *1
Driver supplied with the expansion card
Fibre Channel Controller (PG-FC106)
Other expansion cards
*1: Created from the ServerStart CD-ROM
ꢀ
The latest drivers, refer to the Fujitsu PRIMERGY website (http://primergy.fujitsu.com).
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
4.1.2 How to Create Driver Disks
Driver disks are created from the ServerStart CD-ROM using the ServerStart FloppyBuilder function.
If ServerStart has already been started, it is not necessary to restart it. If it has not, start it up according to
the following procedures.
■ Starting ServerStart
● For Creation on a Client Computer
When the CD has been copied on Windows 2000 Professional/Windows XP
Professional
1
Click [Start] → [Programs] → [Fujitsu ServerStart] → [ServerStart].
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
When Windows NT is used, or if the CD has not been copied
1
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the client computer.
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
● For Creation on the Server
1
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately.
ServerStart starts up and a message appears prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk.
2
Insert the attached "ServerStart floppy disk" into the server's floppy disk drive.
Then make sure "Removable media" and "A:" are selected and click [Create].
A network setup window for remote installation appears.
ꢀ
If a configuration file already exists in the ServerStart floppy disk and [OK] is clicked without
clicking [Create], the [ServerStart Unattended Mode] window appears. Make sure to click
[Exit]. The [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
If [Start] is clicked in the [ServerStart Unattended Mode] window, the installation of the server
will start and all disk contents will be deleted.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3
Click [OK].
The [Initialization of ServerStart core running] window appears and unattended installation will
be started. Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few minutes. When
the process is completed, the [Create a ServerStart Floppy Disk] window appears.
4
Click [or Insert a ServerStart Floppy Disk to Start ServerStart].
The [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
4
5
Eject the ServerStart floppy disk.
■ Creating Driver Disks
Start up ServerStart and confirm that the [Welcome to ServerStart] window is displayed.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
1
Click [FloppyBuilder].
The [ServerStart FloppyBuilder] window appears.
2
Click [Drivers Diskettes].
The [FloppyBuilder Driver Disk] window appears.
3
4
Click the type of the driver you want to create.
Click the driver disk you want to create.
Follow the message and insert a floppy disk.
5
Perform the subsequent operations according to the messages on the window.
The floppy disk will be formatted automatically and file copying will start.
The driver disk is automatically created. When a message appears indicating that creating the
disk is completed, click [OK] and eject the disk.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
4.2 Starting Manual Installation
This section explains the procedures for installing the OS manually.
4.2.1 Installing Windows Server 2003
1
Create driver disks.
Prepare necessary drivers before installing Windows Server 2003.
Some drivers are created from the ServerStart CD-ROM. For how to create driver disks, refer to
2
Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM.
Turn on the server and insert the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM immediately into the CD-ROM
drive. Check there are no floppy disks in the floppy disk drive. When the active area is specified
on the hard disk, the following message appears.
4
Press any key to boot from CD....
Pressing any key while this message is displayed boots the system from the CD-ROM.
3
The [Windows Server 2003 Setup] window appears.
Immediately, the following message appears at the bottom of the window. Press the [F6] key.
Press F6 if you need to install a third party
SCSI or RAID driver ...
ꢁ
This message will be displayed for a short time after the setup window (blue screen) appears.
Press the [F6] key immediately after the window turns blue.
4
Install the drivers manually.
1. When the following message appears, press the [S] key.
To specify additional SCSI adapters, CD-ROM drives,
or special disk controllers for use with Windows,
including those for which you have a device
support disk from a mass storage device
manufacturer, press S.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
2. When the "Please insert the disk labeled Manufacturer-supplied hardware support
disk into Drive A:" message appears, insert the onboard SCSI array controller
driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM and press the [Enter] key.
The following message appears.
You have chosen to configure a SCSI Adapter for use with
Windows, using a device support disk provided by an
adapter manufacturer.
Select the SCSI Adapter you want from the following list,
or press ESC to return to the
previous screen.
3. Select the following and press the [Enter] key.
LSI Logic PCI SCSI/FC MPI Miniport Driver
4. When the following message appears, press the [S] key.
The driver you provided seems to be newer than the Win-
dows default driver.
5
When a Fibre Channel Controller (PG-FC106) is installed, install the fibre
channel card driver.
1. When the following message appears, press the [S] key.
To specify additional SCSI adapters, CD-ROM drives,
or special disk controllers for use with Windows
, including those for which you have a device
support disk from a mass storage device
manufacturer, press S.
2. When the "Please insert the disk labeled Manufacturer-supplied hardware support
disk into Drive A:" message appears, insert the fibre channel card driver disk
created from the ServerStart CD-ROM and press the [Enter] key.
The following message appears.
You have chosen to configure a SCSI Adapter for use with
Windows, using a device support disk provided by an
adapter manufacturer.
Select the SCSI Adapter you want from the following list,
or press ESC to return to the
previous screen.
3. Select the following and press the [Enter] key.
Emulex LP9802 PCI-Fiber Channel HBA
4. When the following message appears, press the [S] key.
The driver you provided seems to be newer than the
Windows default driver.
6
Follow the instructions from the setup program to continue the installation
procedures.
If a message indicating that the driver has failed in the Windows logo test for validating the
compatibility with Windows appears, select [Yes] to continue the installation procedure.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
7
Install the chipset driver.
1. Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the drive of the server.
When the ServerStart window appears, exit ServerStart.
2. Execute the following command on the ServerStart CD-ROM.
[CD-ROM drive] :\DRIVERS\ChipSet\Intel\infinst_autol.exe
The installation wizard starts up.
3. Click [Next]. Follow instructions in the window to perform installation.
4. When the "InstallShield(R) wizard has completed." message appears, eject the
ServerStart CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive and click [Finish] to restart the
system.
8
9
Install the LAN driver.
Install the LAN driver using the driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM. For more
When a SCSI array controller is used for an array configuration or a RAID card
is installed, install RAID Management Tool.
For the installation procedure, refer to "PRIMERGY RX200 S2 Onboard SCSI RAID User's
Guide" or the manual supplied with the RAID card.
4
The installation of Windows Server 2003 has completed.
● Before Starting Operation
After OS installation, refer to the following and perform the necessary procedures.
•
High reliability tool installation
To ensure stable server operation, refer to "Chapter 6 High Reliability Tools" (ꢀpg.159) and install
high-reliability tools.
•
Perform the necessary procedures.
4.2.2 Installing Windows 2000 Server
1
Create driver disks.
Prepare necessary drivers before installing Windows 2000 Server.
Some drivers used with Windows 2000 Server are created from the ServerStart CD-ROM. For
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
2
3
Insert the Windows 2000 Server CD-ROM.
Turn on the server and insert the Windows 2000 Server CD-ROM immediately into the CD-ROM
drive. Check there are no floppy disks in the floppy disk drive. When the active area is specified
on the hard disk, the following message appears.
Press any key to boot from CD．．．．
Pressing any key while this message is displayed boots the system from the CD-ROM.
The [Windows 2000 Server Setup] window appears.
Immediately, the following message appears at the bottom of the window. Press the [F6] key.
Press F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID
driver ...
ꢁ
This message will be displayed for a short time after the setup window (blue screen) appears.
Press the [F6] key immediately after the window turns blue.
4
Install the drivers manually.
1. When the following message appears, press the [S] key.
To specify additional SCSI adapters, CD-ROM drives,
or special disk controllers for use with Windows 2000,
including those for which you have a device
support disk from a mass storage device
manufacturer, press S.
2. When the "Please insert the disk labeled Manufacturer-supplied hardware support
disk into Drive A:" message appears, insert the driver disk created from the
ServerStart CD-ROM and press the [Enter] key.
The following message appears.
You have chosen to configure a SCSI Adapter for use
with Windows 2000, using a device support disk
provided by an adapter manufacturer.
Select the SCSI Adapter you want from the following
list, or press ESC to return to the previous screen.
3. Select the following and press the [Enter] key.
LSI Logic PCI SCSI/FC MPI Miniport Driver
4. Follow the window instructions to perform installation.
When a message prompting you to insert a floppy disk appears, insert the proper
driver disk and press the [Enter] key.
ꢁ
Repeat these procedures to install a driver for another card.
5
Follow the instructions from the setup program to continue the installation
procedures.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
Cautions on Restarting
ꢁ
In the course of installation, a message appears to indicate that the setup program restarts.
Wait until it restarts automatically.
6
Install the chipset driver.
1. Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the drive of the server.
When the ServerStart window appears, exit ServerStart.
2. Execute the following command on the ServerStart CD-ROM.
[CD-ROM drive]:\DRIVERS\ChipSet\Intel\infinst_autol.exe
The installation wizard starts up.
3. Click [Next]. Follow instructions in the window to perform installation.
4. When the "InstallShield(R) wizard has completed." message appears, eject the
ServerStart CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive and click [Finish] to restart the
system.
7
8
Install the LAN driver.
Install the LAN driver using the driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM. For more
4
Install the display driver.
1. Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the drive of the server.
When the ServerStart window appears, exit ServerStart.
2. Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop and click [Manage] from the
displayed menu.
3. Click [Device Manager] from the displayed list.
4. Double-click [ATI Technologies Inc. RAGE XL PCI] under [Display Adapter].
The properties window appears.
5. Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver].
The [Start Device Driver Upgrade] window appears.
6. Click [Next].
The [Install Hardware Device Driver] window appears.
7. Select [Find an optimum driver (Recommended)] and click [Next].
The [Identify Driver File] window appears.
8. Select [CD-ROM drive] in [Search location options] and click [Next].
9. When a message indicating that the driver has been found appears in the [Find
Driver File] window, click [Next].
When the installation is completed, a completion message appears.
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the properties window.
12. Eject the ServerStart CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive and restart the system to
make the settings effective.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
9
After driver installation, apply Windows 2000 Service Pack.
For details, refer to the description in the window.
Drivers may be replaced with those in the Service Pack during Service Pack application. For
more details, refer to the manual supplied with the hardware.
10 When a SCSI array controller is used for an array configuration or a RAID card
is installed, install RAID Management Tool.
For the installation procedure, refer to "PRIMERGY RX200 S2 Onboard SCSI RAID User's
Guide" or the manual supplied with the RAID card.
The installation of Windows 2000 Server has completed.
● Before Starting Operation
After OS installation, refer to the following and perform the necessary procedures.
•
Installation of high reliability tools
To ensure stable server operation, refer to "Chapter 6 High Reliability Tools" (ꢀpg.159) and install
high reliability tools.
•
Perform the necessary procedures.
4.2.3 Installing Linux
For the use of Linux, refer to the Fujitsu PRIMERGY website (http://primergy.fujitsu.com).
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
4.3 Installing the LAN Driver
This section explains the procedure for installing the driver.
In addition to the case where the OS is installed manually, the driver must be installed
when a LAN card is added.
4.3.1 Installing the LAN Driver (Windows Server 2003)
The LAN driver installation procedure differs depending on whether the network adapter was
recognized during the OS installation.
ꢁ
For the following LAN cards, the network adapter is recognized when the card is mounted during OS
installation.
• PG-1852
• PG-1862
4
1
Click [Start] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer Management].
2
Click [Device Manager].
On the Device Manager list, check if a recognized network adapter is present.
(Window example)
Recognized
network adapter
Unrecognized
network adapter
When a recognized network adapter is present, [Network adapters] appears.
•
When a recognized network adapter is present
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
•
When a recognized network adapter is not present
When the LAN driver is installed to [Other devices] before updating the driver for the network
adapter recognized immediately after the OS installation
ꢁ
When driver installation starts, the following window appears.
Clicking [Finish] displays the [Help and Support Center] window. Click [X] to close the window.
After installation, the "!" mark is displayed at the LAN device name in Device Manager. Device names
are displayed properly when all LAN drivers are installed and the system is restarted.
■ Updating LAN Drivers
Perform the following procedures on all LAN device names under [Network adapters] in [Device
Manager].
1
Double-click a LAN device name under [Network adapters].
ꢁ
Names of the LAN devices are displayed as follows.
table: LAN device name
LAN cards
PG-1852
PG-1862
LAN device name
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Desktop Adapter
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Dual Port Server Adapter
2
3
Insert the driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM into the server.
Click [Update Driver] in the [Driver] tab window.
The [Welcome to the Hardware Update Wizard] window appears.
4
5
Select [Install the software automatically (Recommended)] and click [Next].
The driver will be installed.
Click [Finish].
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
6
Click [Close] to close the properties window.
■ Installing the LAN Driver
Perform the following procedures on each [Ethernet controller] under [Other devices] in [Device
Manager].
1
2
Insert the driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM into the server.
Double-click [Ethernet controller] under [Other devices].
The properties window for the Ethernet controller appears.
3
4
Click [Reinstall Driver] in the [General] tab window.
The [Welcome to the Hardware Update Wizard] window appears.
Select [Install the software automatically (Recommended)] and click [Next].
The driver will be installed.
5
6
7
Click [Finish].
4
Click [Close] to close the properties window.
Eject the driver disk and restart the system.
ꢀ
After LAN driver installation, names of the LAN devices are displayed as follows.
table: LAN device name
LAN cards
Onboard LAN (1000BASE-T)
PG-1852
LAN device name
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Dual Port NetWork Connection
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Desktop Adapter
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Dual Port Server Adapter
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MF Server Adapter (LX)
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Server Adapter
PG-1862
PG-1882L
PG-1892L
4.3.2 Installing the LAN Driver (Windows 2000 Server)
1
2
Insert the driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM into the server.
Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop and select [Manage] from
the displayed menu.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
3
Click [Device Manager].
As many [Ethernet controller] items as the installed LAN ports are displayed under [Other
devices].
Double-click each [Ethernet controller] item and perform the following Steps 4 to 11 on all LAN
ports.
4
5
Double-click [Ethernet controller] under [Other devices].
The properties window for the Ethernet controller appears.
Click [Reinstall Driver] in the [General] tab window.
The [Device Driver Upgrade Wizard] window appears.
6
7
Click [Next].
Select [Install an optimum driver (Recommended)] and click [Next].
The [Identify Driver File] window appears.
8
9
Select [Floppy disk drive] in [Search location options] and click [Next].
Detected drivers are displayed.
Click [Next].
Driver installation starts. When it is completed, a completion window appears.
10 Click [Finish].
11 Click [Close] to close the properties window.
ꢀ
When [Ethernet controller] items are displayed under [Other devices], perform the above Steps
4 to 11 on all [Ethernet controller] items.
12 Eject the driver disk and restart the system.
ꢀ
After LAN driver installation, names of the LAN devices are displayed as follows.
table: LAN device name
LAN cards
Onboard LAN (1000BASE-T)
PG-1852
LAN device name
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Dual Port NetWork Connection
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Desktop Adapter
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Dual Port Server Adapter
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MF Server Adapter (LX)
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Server Adapter
PG-1862
PG-1882L
PG-1892L
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ When a LAN Card is Added
The following window may appear at system startup after addition of a LAN card. Perform the
appropriate procedure according to the displayed window.
•
•
When the "New Hardware Detection Wizard" window appears
Insert the driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM and perform Step 6 and subsequent steps
in "Updating LAN Drivers".
When the [Insert Disk] window prompts you to insert the "Intel PRO Adapter CD-ROM or floppy
disk" or "Intel® PRO/1000 Disk Driver".
Insert the driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM and install the driver.
ꢀ
The "Digital signature was not found" message may appear. If it appears, click [Yes] to continue the
operations.
ꢀ
When the [Overwriting the Files] window appears, normally do not overwrite the files (select [Do not
overwrite all files]).
4.3.3 Latest Drivers
4
The latest drivers, refer to the Fujitsu PRIMERGY website (http://primergy.fujitsu.com).
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5.1 Memory Dump/Paging File Setting
Before start operating this server, configure the setting for obtaining memory dump.
The setting procedure varies between Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000
Server.
● Memory Dump
If memory dump is set, debugging information will be automatically saved when a STOP error (fatal
system error) occurs in the system. Using the saved memory dump, error cause can be analyzed.
If the amount of installed memory is large, pay special attention when setting the memory dump file.The
settings for obtaining memory dump should be configured after installing the files to be used for
operations (OS, applications, etc.).
5.1.1 How to Obtain Memory Dump
For Windows Server 2003
Check the following settings before starting configuration to obtain memory dump.
■ Checking Hard Disk Free Space
To obtain memory dump, sufficient hard disk capacity is required for creating paging files and memory
dump files.
The obtainable dump types and required hard disk capacity are as follows.
● Complete Memory (Full) Dump
When the system unexpectedly stops, contents of the whole system memory are recorded. The file is
stored in the directory displayed in the [Dump file] box.
•
•
Paging file: Installed physical memory + 11MB (Recommended: Installed physical memory x 1.5)
Memory dump file: Same amount as installed physical memory
● Kernel Memory Dump
Information of only kernel memory space is recorded. The file is stored in the directory displayed in the
[Dump file] box. Capacity required for kernel memory dump is as follows.
•
Paging file: Depending on installed physical memory amount
For memory of 256 to 1,373MB - Installed physical memory x 1.5
For memory of 1,374MB or more - 32-bit system: 2GB+16MB,
64-bit system: RAM size + 128MB
•
Memory dump file: Depending on the used amount of kernel-mode address space during STOP
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
● Small Memory Dump
Minimum amount of useful information for problem identification is recorded. If this option is specified,
a new file is created each time the system unexpectedly stops.
History of such files is stored in the directory displayed in [Small dump directory].
•
•
Paging file: 2MB or more
Memory dump file: 64KB or 128KB
■ Memory Dump File Setting
Set up the memory dump file according to the following procedures.
1
2
Log on to the server with administrator privileges.
Check free space of the drive where the memory dump file is to be stored.
(ꢀpg.128).
3
4
Click [Start] → [Control Panel] → [System].
The [System Properties] window appears.
Click the [Advanced] tab and click [Settings] in [Startup and Recovery].
The [Startup and Recovery] window appears.
5
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5
Set as follows.
1. In the [Write debugging information] section, select the memory dump file type.
• Small memory dump (64KB)
Minimum information is recorded to the memory dump file.
Each time a fatal error occurs, a new file is created in the directory specified in [Small
dump directory].
• Kernel memory dump
Only kernel memory is recorded to the memory dump file.
• Complete memory dump (Recommended)
The whole system memory information is recorded to the memory dump file.
2. In [Dump file] or [Small dump directory], specify the directory to save the memory
dump file, with its full path.
In case of kernel memory dump or complete memory dump, if [Overwrite any existing file]
is checked, debugging information is overwritten to the specified file every time.
6
7
8
Click [OK] to close the [Startup and Recovery] window.
Click [OK] to close the [System Properties] window.
Restart the system.
The setting is enabled after the system is restarted.
■ Paging File Setting
Set up the paging file according to the following procedures.
1
2
Log on to the server with administrator privileges.
Check free space of the drive where the system is installed.
(ꢀpg.128).
3
4
Click [Start] → [Control Panel] → [System].
The [System Properties] window appears.
Click the [Advanced] tab and click [Settings] in [Performance].
The [Performance Options] window appears.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
5
Click the [Advanced] tab.
6
Click [Change] in the [Virtual memory] section.
The [Virtual Memory] window appears.
5
7
Specify the drive where the paging file is to be created.
In [Drive], select the drive where the system is installed.
The selected drive is displayed in [Drive] in [Paging file size for selected drive].
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
8
Select [Custom size] and enter a value in [Initial size].
The value depends on the type of the set dump file.
Specify a value larger than the value shown in [Recommended] in [Total paging file size for all
drives].
ꢁ
When a smaller value is specified for the paging file size, performance may be affected. For
maximum system efficiency, be sure to set [Initial size] with a value larger than the [Recom-
mended] size described in [Total paging file size for all drives]. The recommended size is total
memory installed in the system x 1.5. However, if a program consuming a large amount of
memory is regularly used, set a larger size as required.
9
Enter a value in [Maximum size].
Specify a value larger than the [Initial size].
10 Save the settings.
Click [Set] in the [Paging file size for selected drive] section.
The settings are saved, and the value specified is displayed in [Paging File Size] of [Drive].
11 Click [OK] to close the [Virtual Memory] window.
12 Click [OK] to close the [Performance Options] window.
13 Click [OK] to close the [System Properties] window.
14 Restart the system.
The setting is enabled after the system is restarted.
5.1.2 How to Obtain Memory Dump
For Windows 2000 Server
Check the following settings before starting configuration to obtain memory dump.
■ Checking Hard Disk Free Space
Once memory dump is obtained, a file containing contents of the whole physical memory installed in the
system is created. Before storing the dump file, confirm that there is sufficient free space in hard disk.
The obtainable dump types and required hard disk capacity are as follows.
● Complete Memory (Full) Dump
When the system unexpectedly stops, contents of the whole system memory are recorded. If this option
is selected, space to retain the paging file as large as the whole physical memory x 1.3 is required in the
boot volume.
•
Included information
Common header, all virtual address pages that are not paged out during STOP
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
•
Required size
Installed physical memory x 1.3
● Kernel Memory Dump
Information of only kernel memory space is recorded. When the system unexpectedly stops, the process
that records information to the log file is speeded up. According to the amount of memory installed in
the server, available area of 50 to 800MB is required for the paging file in the boot volume.
•
Included information
Common header, summary dump header (complete memory dump) - (user process space page) -
(cache region page) - (unused pool region page)
Required size
•
Depending on the used amount of kernel-mode address space during STOP
● Small Memory Dump
Minimum amount of useful information for problem identification is recorded. In this option, a paging
file of at least 2MB is required in the boot volume. Also, a new file is created each time the system
unexpectedly stops.
History of such files is stored in the directory displayed in [Small dump directory] (usually,
C:\winnt\minidump).
•
•
Included information
Common header, minidump header, kernel module, memory information, processor information,
process information, thread information, stuck page, unloaded module information
5
Required size
2MB or more
■ Memory Dump File Setting
Set up the memory dump file according to the following procedures.
1
2
Log on to the server with administrator privileges.
Check free space of the drive where the memory dump file is to be stored.
(ꢀpg.132).
3
4
Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
Double-click the [System] icon.
The [System Properties] window appears.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5
Click the [Advanced] tab and click [Startup and Recovery].
The [Startup and Recovery] window appears.
6
Set as follows.
1. In the [Write debugging information] section, select the memory dump file type.
• Small memory dump (2MB or more)
Minimum information is recorded to the memory dump file.
Each time a fatal error occurs, a new file is created in the directory specified in [Small
dump directory].
• Kernel memory dump
Only kernel memory is recorded to the memory dump file.
• Complete memory dump (Recommended)
The whole system memory information is recorded to the memory dump file.
2. In [Dump file] or [Small dump directory], specify the directory to save the memory
dump file, with its full path.
In case of kernel memory dump or complete memory dump, if [Overwrite any existing file]
is checked, debugging information is overwritten to the specified file every time.
7
8
9
Click [OK] to close the [Startup and Recovery] window.
Click [OK] to close the [System Properties] window.
Restart the system.
The setting is enabled after the system is restarted.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Paging File Setting
Set up the paging file according to the following procedures.
1
2
Log on to the server with administrator privileges.
Check free space of the drive where the system is installed.
(ꢀpg.263).
3
4
Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
Double-click the [System] icon.
The [System Properties] window appears.
5
Click the [Advanced] tab and click [Performance Options].
The [Performance Options] window appears.
5
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
6
Click [Change] in the [Virtual memory] section.
The [Virtual Memory] window appears.
7
8
Specify the drive where the paging file is to be created.
In [Drive], select the drive where the system is installed.
The selected drive is displayed in [Drive] in [Paging file size for selected drive].
Specify the [Initial size].
The value depends on the type of the set dump file.
Specify a value larger than the value shown in [Recommended] in [Total paging file size for all
drives].
ꢁ
When a smaller value is specified for the paging file size, performance may be affected. We
recommend to specify the paging file size larger than the recommended value.
9
Specify the [Maximum size].
Specify a value larger than the [Initial size].
10 Save the settings.
Click [Set] in the [Paging file size for selected drive] section.
The settings are saved, and the value specified is displayed in [Paging File Size] of [Drive].
11 Click [OK] to close the [Virtual Memory] window.
12 Click [OK] to close the [Performance Options] window.
13 Click [OK] to close the [System Properties] window.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
14 Restart the system.
The setting is enabled after the system is restarted.
5
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5.2 Creating a Disk for System
Recovery
If the installation of the OS was performed manually, create a system recovery disk.
ꢁ
ꢁ
If the system file, system configuration or environment setting change at startup, etc., are damaged,
such data can be reconstructed using the recovery information stored in the created system recovery
disk.
To create a recovery disk, you need an unused formatted floppy disk. Prepare it in advance.
5.2.1 Creating the Automated System Recovery (ASR) Set
For Windows Server 2003
After setting up Windows Server 2003, create a system recovery set. To do this, you need an unused
formatted floppy disk and a medium to store back up files.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Click [Start] → [All Programs] → [Accessories] → [System Tool] → [Backup].
The [Backup or Recovery Wizard] window appears.
Click [Next].
The [Backup or Recovery] window appears.
Select [Create a backup of files and settings], and then click [Next].
The [Items to Create Backups] window appears
Select [All the information in this computer], and then click [Next].
The [Backup Type, Destination and Name of the Backup File] window appears.
Specify name and destination of the backup file, and then click [Next].
The [Backup or Recovery Wizard Complete] window appears.
Click [Finish].
Backup process starts.
If a message prompting you to insert a floppy disk appears, insert the floppy
disk and click [OK].
Automated system recovery disk is created.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8
9
When the process is completed, a message appears. Remove the floppy disk
according to the message and put a label on it.
Label example: Windows Automated System Recovery Disk: Backup.bkf, Created at 12:00 04/
01/2003
Click [OK] to exit [Backup Utility].
10 Click [Close] to close the [Backup Progress] window.
An automated system recovery set has been created.
Store the automated system recovery set just created in a secure location.
5.2.2 Creating a System Recovery Disk
For Windows 2000 Server
After setting up Windows Server 2000, create a system recovery disk. To do this, you need an unused
formatted floppy disk.
1
2
3
Put a label showing "Windows 2000 system recovery disk" onto a floppy disk
and insert it into the floppy disk drive.
Click [Start] → [Programs] → [Accessories] → [System Tools] → [Backup].
The backup window appears.
5
Click the [Wizard] tab and click [System Recovery Disk].
Create a system recovery disk by following the window instructions.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5.3 Storing the System Setting
Information
Before starting operations, store the configuration information of the BIOS setup
utility. By storing this information, the system can be recovered with the stored
information in case of a system failure (such as when the information is deleted due
to the drain of the built-in battery). Use Server Management Tools for storing and
recovering the system configuration information.
ꢀ
Be sure to store the BIOS information after the following operations.
• When the information is changed with the BIOS setup utility
• When the hardware configuration of this server is changed (e.g. a CPU, memory, baseboard or
expansion card is added/removed or changed)
■ Preparation for Using Server Management Tools
Before using Server Management Tools, prepare the "Server Management Tools" disk supplied with the
server at hand.
■ Notes
•
Server Management Tools are for this server only. Do not use those tools on other systems.
Otherwise, the system can be damaged.
•
Only the information that is configured with the BIOS setup utility can be stored/recovered with
Server Management Tools. The BIOS information in internal SCSI devices or expansion cards
cannot be stored/recovered.
•
Make sure to start up the server with the "Server Management Tools" disk before running Server
Management Tools. Do not run Server Management Tools on the server started from the hard disk or
by the other floppy disks. Otherwise, the system may be corrupted.
•
•
Do not eject a floppy disk while the floppy disk access LED is on. Such an action may lead not only
to corruption of the floppy disk data but also an unstable state of the system.
If an error message appears while running Server Management Tools, respond to the message
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
5.3.1 How to Store the BIOS Information
Store the BIOS information according to the following procedures.
ꢀ
Before starting the operation, if the "OS Boot Monitoring" function of ServerView is enabled, disable it
(it is disabled by default).
If you start up the system while the "OS Boot Monitoring" function remains effective, the operation of
the server may become unpredictable at such times as an abrupt power interruption or restart.
If it is necessary to operate the server with the "OS Boot Monitoring" function enabled, enable the
function after storing the BIOS information.
For details of ServerView, refer to "ServerView User's Guide".
1
Turn on the server and insert the "Server Management Tools" disk into the
floppy disk drive.
2
When the DOS prompt window appears, enter the following command and
press the [Enter] key.
A:\SMTOOL\>biossave.bat
ꢀ
If storing has already been performed with Server Management Tools, the stored file must exist
in the floppy disk. In this case, overwriting the file may lead to incompletion of BIOS information
recovery. Move the file to another floppy disk, rename the file, or delete it by executing the fol-
lowing command.
5
A:\SMTOOL\>deldat.bat [Enter]
3
If the BIOS information is stored correctly, the following message appears.
Success!
Storing procedure is completed. The server can now be turned off safely.
5.3.2 How to Recover the BIOS Information
If the information configured with the BIOS setup utility was deleted due to a drain of the built-in server
battery, etc., restore the BIOS information according to the following procedures.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Do not turn off the server during a program run.
Before starting up the system by inserting the "Server Management Tools" disk, check to see that the
"OS Boot Monitoring" function of ServerView is disabled (default setting).
If you start up the system while the "OS Boot Monitoring" function remains effective, the operation of
the server may become unpredictable at such times as an abrupt power interruption or restart.
If the server is operated with the "OS Boot Monitoring" function enable, enable the function again
before resuming operation. For details of ServerView, refer to "ServerView User's Guide".
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
1
2
Turn on the server and insert the "Server Management Tools" disk into the
floppy disk drive.
When the DOS prompt window appears, enter the following command and
press the [Enter] key.
A:\SMTOOL\>biosrest.bat
3
The following procedures differ depending on the BIOS setting to be restored.
When the network startup (PXE) is disabled (disabled at the time of purchase)
If the BIOS information is restored correctly, the following message appears.
Success!
When the network startup (PXE) is enabled
The following message appears.
Success!
-----------------------------------------------
Execute 'biosrest.bat' twice in order to restore
BIOS settings completely.
Please run 'biosrest.bat' again after a reboot,
if this operation is the first time.
-----------------------------------------------
In this case, the BIOS information restoration procedure must be performed twice.Restart the
server and perform Steps 1 and 2.
When the BIOS information is set correctly, the following message appears again.
Success!
-----------------------------------------------
Execute 'biosrest.bat' twice in order to restore
BIOS settings completely.
Please run 'biosrest.bat' again after a reboot,
if this operation is the first time.
-----------------------------------------------
4
The BIOS information will be enabled after the next system restart. Restart the
server.
Perform Step 1 to display the DOS prompt window. The restoration procedure has been
completed. The server can now be turned off safely.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
5.4 Creating Maintenance Tools
This section explains how to create tools for maintaining the server.
Maintenance tools are created with the FloppyBuilder function of ServerStart.
With the FloppyBuilder function of ServerStart, you can create the following tools.
•
•
DOS floppy disks
Hardware Configuration Tools (such as Server Management Tools)
The FloppyBuilder can be used under environments such as.
•
•
the ServerStart system started on a client computer (recommended)
the system started on the server using the ServerStart CD-ROM
ꢀ
When creating the tools on a client computer, it is necessary to install ServerStart on the client
computer beforehand.Install it according to"2.4 Preparation for Using ServerStart on a Client
Computer" (ꢁpg.49).
If ServerStart of a different version is installed in the computer, make sure to uninstall the ServerStart.
Then perform installation again. For details on how to uninstall ServerStart, refer to "2.4.2 Uninstalling
ServerStart" (ꢁpg.51).
5
ꢀ
The FloppyBuilder function may not operate correctly if you start up ServerStart while ServerStart of a
different version is installed in the computer. Make sure to uninstall a different version of ServerStart.
5.4.1 Creating a DOS Floppy Disk
For DOS data stored into the floppy disk, refer to the file in the following folder of the ServerStart CD-
ROM.
[CD-ROM drive]: \FreeDOS
To create a DOS floppy disk, you need an unused floppy disk. Prepare it in advance.
If ServerStart has already been started, it is not necessary to restart it. If it has not, start it up according to
the following procedures.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
■ Starting ServerStart
● For Creation on a Client Computer
When the CD has been copied on Windows 2000 Professional/Windows XP
Professional
1
Click [Start] → [Programs] → [Fujitsu ServerStart] → [ServerStart].
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
When Windows NT is used, or if the CD has not been copied
1
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the client computer.
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
● For Creation on the Server
1
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately.
ServerStart starts up and a message appears prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk.
2
Insert the attached "ServerStart floppy disk" into the server's floppy disk drive.
Then make sure "Removable media" and "A:" are selected and click [Create].
A network setup window for remote installation appears.
ꢀ
If a configuration file already exists in the ServerStart floppy disk and [OK] is clicked without
clicking [Create], the [ServerStart Unattended Mode] window appears. Make sure to click
[Exit]. The [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
If [Start] is clicked in the [ServerStart Unattended Mode] window, the installation of the server
will start and all disk contents will be deleted.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3
Click [OK].
The [Initialization of ServerStart core running] window appears and unattended installation will
be started. Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few minutes.When
the process is completed, the [Create a ServerStart Floppy Disk] window appears.
4
Click [or Insert a ServerStart Floppy Disk to Start ServerStart].
The [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
5
5
Eject the ServerStart floppy disk.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
■ Creating a DOS Floppy Disk
Start up ServerStart and confirm that the [Welcome to ServerStart] window is displayed.
1
Click [FloppyBuilder].
The [ServerStart FloppyBuilder] window appears.
2
3
Click [DOS Diskette].
Insert the prepared floppy disk by following the message.
Perform the procedures following to the messages on the window.
The floppy disk will be formatted automatically and file copying will start.
The DOS floppy disk will be created automatically.
When a message appears indicating that creating the disk is completed, click [OK] and eject the
disk.
5.4.2 Creating a Hardware Configuration Tool
This section explains how to create a Hardware Configuration Tool from the ServerStart CD-ROM.
Prepare floppy disks as many as the tools you want to create beforehand.
Types of a Hardware Configuration Tool vary by model.
1
Start up ServerStart and click [FloppyBuilder].
2
3
Click [Hardware Configuration Tool].
Click the tool you want to create.
Insert the prepared floppy disk by following the message.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
4
Perform the subsequent operations according to the messages on the window.
The floppy disk will be formatted automatically and file copying will start.
The respective tools will be created automatically. When a message appears indicating that the
disk is created, click [OK] and eject the disk.
5
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5.5 Notes Before Operating the
Server
This section explains the settings required before starting to operate the server.
For the respective settings, refer to "First Step Guide".
•
•
When connecting a SCSI optional device (such as a hard disk cabinet or DAT), connect it according
•
For the settings for the installed applications supplied with the product, refer to the manuals of each
application.
5.5.1 Updating the System
■ Windows Update
The system being used must be updated to prevent potential problems in the system.
Executing Windows Update can automatically search the latest version of QFE applicable to the OS and
update the system to the latest status.Execute Windows Update periodically. Executing Windows Update
requires a network environment connectable to the Internet.
5.5.2 Auto-run Function from CD-ROM Drives
Perform the following procedures to change the settings of the auto-run function from the CD-ROM
drives after server installation.
1
2
Make the registry editable, and change the value of AutoRun of the following
registry key.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\CDRom
To enable auto-run, set the value of Autorun to "1", and to disable auto-run, set the value to "0".
Restart the system.
The setting is enabled after the system is restarted.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
5.5.3 Drive Letter Assignment in Expert Mode
In expert mode, you cannot specify a drive letter to a particular partition arbitrarily. Drive letters
specified with Disk Manager in expert mode will be sequentially assigned from the first partition with
"C, D, E..." when installation is completed, and an unused drive letter will be assigned to the CD-ROM
drive.
To change the drive letter, perform the following procedures after installation.
ꢀ
You cannot change the drive letters for the system and boot drive.
■ For Windows Server 2003
1
2
3
Click [Start] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer Management].
Click [Disk Management].
Right-click the partition to change the letter and click [Change Drive Letter and
Path].
The [Change Drive Letter and Path] window appears.
4
5
Click [Edit].
5
The [Change Drive Letter or Path] window appears.
Change the drive letter.
■ For Windows 2000 Server
1
2
3
Right-click [My Computer] icon on the desktop and select [Manage].
Click [Disk Management].
Right-click the partition to change the letter and select [Change Drive Letter
and Path].
The [Change Drive Letter and Path] window appears.
4
5
Click [Edit].
The [Change Drive Letter or Path] window appears.
Change the drive letter.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5.5.4 Notes on Advanced Uninterruptible Power Supply
(UPS)
Note the following points when using an advanced uninterruptible power supply (referred to as UPS
afterward).
■ UPS Shutdown Time Setting
Specify enough time for the UPS power-off time (time from the shutdown direction to the actual power-
off). If this time is set insufficiently, the power will be cut off before system shutdown, which may result
in destruction of data. For more details, refer to the manuals for UPS and UPS management software.
■ Power Supply Control by UPS
Change BIOS settings as follows to power the server on automatically using the UPS management
software (PowerChute Network Shutdown, PowerChute Business Editon) at power recovery or during
scheduled operation. For details on how to set the BIOS Setup Utility, refer to "8.2 BIOS Setup Utility"
(ꢁpg.208).
1
2
Start the BIOS Setup Utility.
From the [Advanced] menu, select the [Power On/Off] submenu and press the
[Enter] key.
The [Power On/Off] submenu window appears.
3
Set the [Power Failure Recovery] to [Always On].
5.5.5 Turning the Power On/Off via a LAN
You can turn the power on/off the server from a client (via a LAN) by utilizing the Wakeup on LAN
(WOL) function.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Be sure to install ServerView to control the power supply via a LAN.
When ServerView is not installed, the server is not turned off automatically after OS shutdown.
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the power cable is disconnected from the server or the server is powered off due to power
interruption, restart the server. Unless the server is restarted, the WOL function will be disabled.
Only the onboard LAN supports the WOL function on this server. Make sure you connect the onboard
LAN to a control power supply via a LAN.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ BIOS Setup Utility Setting
When power management is performed via a LAN, configure the settings as follows using the BIOS
Setup Utility. This is set to "Enabled" by default.
1
2
Start the BIOS Setup Utility.
From the [Advanced] menu, select the [Power On/Off] submenu and press the
[Enter] key.
The [Power On/Off] submenu window appears.
3
Set [LAN:] of [Power On Source] to [Enabled].
ꢀ
5
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5.5.6 Other Notes on Operation
■ Unnecessary Files
After OS installation is completed, folders named Runonce and Runonce 2 may be left in the drive
where the OS is installed. Delete these folders since you do not need them for the system operation.
■ Notes on 24-hour Operation
● Automated System Operation
To provide an extra margin of safety against unintentional damage, introduce disaster-prevention
measures in the office and keep disaster prevention personnel (such as a security guard or janitor) in the
building.
● Unintentional Power-off Prevention
We recommend the installation of a special power supply device (such as a distribution board) to prevent
unplanned power shut-offs.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
5.6 LAN Driver Advanced Setup
®
Use Intel PROSet for LAN driver advanced setup.
5.6.1 Intel® PROSet
®
■ Intel PROSet Installation
®
If the OS is installed using ServerStart, Intel PROSet is already installed with the driver. If Windows
®
Server 2003/Windows 2000 Server is installed manually, Intel PROSet will not be installed.
®
On Windows Server 2003/Windows 2000 Server, if [Intel PROSet] is not displayed in the [Control
Panel], install Intel® PROSet according to the following installation procedures.
1
Start the following EXE file contained in the ServerStart CD-ROM.
For Windows Server 2003
[CD-ROM drive]: \Tools\GENERAL\Intel\ProsetW2k3\Proset.exe
For Windows 2000 Server
[CD-ROM drive]: \Tools\GENERAL\Intel\ProsetW2k\Proset.exe
5
2
Select [Automatic execution-runs setup immediately] and click [OK].
Perform the subsequent procedures by following the instructions.
®
■ Notes on Referring to the Intel PROSet Help Topics
When referring to help topics, note the following points.
•
•
•
Do not use the driver downloaded from the Intel Corporation online service page on this server.
If the descriptions in the help and this manual vary, give priority to this manual.
The name of LAN cards appears in the help texts corresponds to the cards as follows.
table: LAN cards appear in the help texts
LAN cards appear in the help text
PRO/1000 Desktop
Corresponding LAN cards
PG-1852
PG-1862/PG-1882L/PG-1892L
PG-1852/PG-1862/PG-1882L/PG-1892L
PG-1852/PG-1862/PG-1892L
PG-1882L
PRO/1000 Server
PRO/1000 Adaptor
PRO/1000 Copper Adaptor
PRO/1000 Fiber Adaptor
82540-based Adaptor
PG-1852
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
•
The controllers of the onboard LAN and LAN cards are as follows.
table: Controller being used
LAN cards Controller being used
Intel® 82547GB
Onboard LAN (1000BASE-T)
PG-1852
Intel® 82540EM
Intel® 82546EB
Intel® 82545GM
PG-1862
PG-1882L/PG-1892L
5.6.2 Cautions for PG-1852/1862/188x/189xLAN Driver V8.3
■ Event Log
Once a Team is setup, multiple identical logs from the same source that starts with the following log may
be stored in the system log file of the event viewer at system start-up.
Source
ID
iANSMiniport
11
Type
Warning
The following adaptor link is not connected: (Adapter name)
* (Adapter name) varies depending on the OS or hardware configuration.
Description
Since such event logs will be stored nonetheless even if the Teaming function is operated normally,
ignore them.
5.6.3 Teaming Function
■ Notes
When using the Teaming function, note the following points.
•
•
You require Service Pack 2 or later for Windows 2000 Server.
For AFT/ALB/FEC/GEC type, you can incorporate up to four LAN ports into one team and two ports
for a SFT type team.
®
•
Once a Team is created, virtual adapters (Intel Advanced Network Service Virtual Adapter) will be
created in the [Device Manager] and/or [Network and Dial-up Connections] of the system. Do not
disable or delete this virtual adapter from the [Device Manager] or [Network and Dial-up
®
Connections]. When deleting a virtual adapter, make sure to use "Intel PROSet".
•
•
When the Teaming function is being used, you can only use the following protocols.
• For AFT/SFT/FEC/GEC type: IP, NetBEUI, IPX (NCP), IPX (NetBIOS)
• For ALB type: IP, IPX (NCP)
When the Teaming function is being used, you cannot use the hardware assist function of IPSEC. Do
not use this function even if the function is installed in all cards in the team.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
•
When the Teaming function is being used, you cannot use Windows Load Balancing Service
(WLBS) and Network Load Balancing (NLB).
•
•
•
PG-1852 does not become a member of a Team.
If FEC/GEC type is selected, you can only use the switch for link aggregation.
When adding/deleting a FEC/GEC type member, perform such operation under a linked down state.
ꢀ
Only a link down error between a LAN card (onboard LAN) and the switch it connects with, and the
equivalent errors lead to switching of the route. Therefore, if only the switch or LAN card (onboard
LAN) is partially damaged and the route being used is sound at the link level, the route will not be
switched in the team, but the communication within the Team may become an error.
■ Teaming Configuration Procedure
®
1
Start up Intel PROSet. The procedure differs depending on the OS being
used.
For Windows Server 2003
1. Click [Start] → [Control Panel] → [Intel(R) PROSet].
For Windows 2000 Server
1. Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] window appears.
2. Start up "Intel(R) PROSet".
5
2
3
Select a card to incorporate in a Team and right-click it.
Click [Create New Team] in [Add to Team].
[Teaming Up Wizard] appears.
4
Select a Teaming type with which you want to create a Team.
Select the following depending on the Teaming type selected accordingly.
• AFT type: "Adapter fault tolerance"
• ALB type: "Adaptive load balancing"
• SFT type: "Switch fault tolerance"
• FEC type: "FEC/802.3ad Static link aggregation"
• GEC type: "GEC/802.3ad Static link aggregation"
5
6
Select a LAN card to incorporate in the Team and click [Next].
Click [Finish].
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
7
Click [OK].
When the Teaming setting is completed, the following virtual adapter will be created.
• Intel(R) Advanced Network Services Virtual Adapter
Upper protocols will be bound with the main virtual adapter.
You cannot bind them with the LAN card consisting of a Team.
The IP address can be set in the main virtual adapter.
5.6.4 VLAN
■ Notes
When using a VLAN, note the following points.
•
•
•
•
You can only have "NetBIOS over TCP/IP" enabled for up to four VLANs in the whole system.
On a VLAN, do not use protocols other than TCP/IP.
You can only set ten or less VLANs to a LAN port.
When adding or deleting a VLAN, always use "Intel(R) PROSet". Do not disable or delete a VLAN
from the [Device Manager] or [Network and Dial-up Connections].
■ VLAN Setup Procedure
®
1
Start up "Intel PROSet". The procedure differs depending on the OS being
used.
For Windows Server 2003
1. Click [Start] → [Control Panel] → [Intel(R) PROSet].
For Windows 2000 Server
1. Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] window appears.
2. Start up "Intel(R) PROSet".
2
3
Select a LAN card to setup a VLAN and right-click it.
Click [Add VLAN]. The following message may be displayed at the time. In such
a case, click [Yes].
You need to connect with the switch that supports IEEE
VLANs (802.1Q). Do you want to enable QOS Packet Tagging?
4
5
Specify [ID] and [Name]. Then click [OK].
The [ID] should be identical with the switch setting.
The [Name] does not need to be identical with the switch setting.
Repeat Step 3 through 5 to set respective VLANs.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
6
Click [OK].
When setup of the VLAN is completed, the following virtual adapter will be created.
• "Intel(R) Advanced Network Services Virtual Adapter"
Upper protocols will be bound with the main virtual adapter. You cannot bind them with the LAN
card consisting a VLAN. The IP address should be specified in the main virtual adapter.
5.6.5 Local Address Setting
Specify a local address according to the following procedures.
®
1
Start up "Intel PROSet". The procedure differs depending on the OS being
used.
For Windows Server 2003
1. Click [Start] → [Control Panel] → [Intel(R) PROSet].
For Windows 2000 Server
1. Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] window appears.
2. Start up "Intel(R) PROSet".
2
3
Select a LAN card to set the local address and click the [Advanced] tab.
Specify a local address in [Locally Managed Address].
5
5.6.6 Jumbo Frame
1000BASE-T/1000BASE-SX supports Jumbo frame. When using Jumbo frame, construct the Jumbo
frame network using only devices that support Jumbo frame and apply the settings that will enable
Jumbo frame.
Configure setting for Jumbo frame according to the following procedures.
1
2
3
Start up "Intel(R) PROSet" from [Control Panel].
Select a LAN card to perform configuration and click the [Advanced] tab.
Specify the maximum frame size in the [Jumbo Frame] tab.
■ Other Cautions
You cannot connect devices directly with a cross cable without connecting a hub switch or router in
between.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 High Reliability Tools
6.1 Server Monitoring Tool
[ServerView]
ServerView constantly monitors the status of the servers' hardware in the network
and provides a console with which the administrator can check the status of all the
servers at a glance. In addition, if an error occurs, the administrator will be notified in
real-time to take immediate action.
■ Installing ServerView
● When Installed Using ServerStart
If the OS is implemented and setup using ServerStart, ServerView will be installed at once with the OS
and other high reliability tools.
● When Installed Manually
Perform installation referring to "Chapter 2 Installing" in "ServerView User's Guide".
● For Linux
ServerView cannot be installed using ServerStart. To install ServerView into a Linux system, refer to
"ServerView User's Guide".
ꢀ
ꢀ
Be sure to install SNMP service before installing ServerView.
Systems with Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 may display the following popup message at the
next startup after ServerView installation or uninstallation.This is not a problem. Click [Close message]
to close the message.
Windows has terminated the following program(s) to protect
your computer.
Name:
SNMP Service
■ Setting Required after Installation
Perform necessary operations after ServerView installation referring to "2.4 Checking after Installation"
in "ServerView User's Guide".
■ Boot Monitoring Setting
We recommend enabling the "Boot Monitoring" function after ServerView is installed. For setting
procedures and explanation on the function, refer to the [Restart Settings] Tab of "3.2.4 Serious Error
Handling (ASR)" in "ServerView User's Guide".
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Notes on Using the Console Redirection Function
On Windows Server 2003 servers, the serial port cannot be used for console redirection using
RemoteControlService supplied with ServerView.For information on RemoteControlService, refer to
"ServerView User's Guide".
6
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 High Reliability Tools
6.2 Solving Problems Early [DSNAP]
DSNAP is a tool for collectively acquiring failure investigation information such as
server environment information.
■ Installing DSNAP
Copy the "DSNAP.EXE" file stored in the "\PROGRAMS\Japanese\DSNAP" folder of the ServerStart
CD-ROM into the server's hard disk.
■ How to Use
This topic is discussed in the "\PROGRAMS\Japanese\DSNAP\README.TXT" file in the ServerStart
CD-ROM. Use a text editor to open it.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Installing Internal Options
This chapter explains how to install internal
options on this server. Contact an office listed in
the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide"
regarding installation and removal of internal
options.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
7.1 Before Installing Internal Options
The following types of internal options can be installed on this server.
Expansion card
Power supply unit
Memory module
CPU
[Front]
Internal hard disk unit
Internal CD-ROM drive unit
ꢀ
ꢀ
When installing or removing devices, make sure to use the removed screws on the same location and
devices that were last installed or removed. Failure to do so can damage the device.
The types of installable options described in this manual are subject to change without notice.
• When installing/removing internal options to/from the server, turn off the
server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug
all power cables from the server. Failure to do so may cause electric shock
• Do not disassemble the power supply unit. Doing so may cause electric
shock.
• Do not install unauthorized third party internal options. Doing so may cause a
device failure, fire, or electric shock.
• Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may cause a
device failure, fire, or electric shock.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
• Devices inside the server remain hot after shutdown. Wait for a while after
shutdown before installing or removing internal options.
• The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed. They
can be damaged by static electricity. Before handling them, first touch a metal
part of the server to discharge static electricity.
• Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas
or the edges of the circuit boards.
• If devices are installed using the methods other than those outlined in this
chapter or disassembled, the warranty will be invalidated.
7
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
7.2 Removing and Attaching the Top
Cover
Remove the top cover to install internal options. Perform the following procedures to
remove the top cover.
• When removing or attaching the top cover, turn off the server and all peripheral
devices. Also unplug all power cables from the server. Failure to do so may
• Use tip preventive stabilizers when installing the rack.
Pulling the server out of the rack without installing stabilizers may cause the
rack to tip over.
7.2.1 How to Remove the Top Cover
1
2
Open the rack door.
Turn off the server and peripheral devices, then unplug the power cables from
the server.
3
4
5
Remove all cables (e.g., SCSI and LAN cables) from the server.
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Loosen the two screws on the front of the server.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
6
7
8
Pull out the server until it locks into position.
Lock
• When pulling the server out or pushing it back, be careful not to pinch fingers
or clothes.
While pulling the locks on both sides, pull the server a little to release the locks.
Release
• If the server is pulled out too far, it can fall, resulting in injury.
7
Hold the central areas of the server, and pull the server to remove from the
rack.
Hold the center of each side
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
9
Loosen the screw on the rear of the server.
10 Slide the top cover slowly to the rear and lift it to remove from the server.
Top cover
■ How to Attach the Top Cover
To attach the top cover, simply reverse procedures in "7.2.1 How to Remove the Top Cover" (ꢁpg.166).
Notes on installing the server on the rack
ꢀ
Pull part A on the slide rail (on both sides) toward the front of the slide rail until it stops.
Part A
ꢀ
When sliding the server backward, be sure to keep the slide rails and inner rails on both sides parallel
to each other.
Lock
Slide rail
Inner rail
ꢀ
Check to make sure no tools or unnecessary components were left inside the server before attaching
the top cover back into place.
ꢀ
ꢀ
When sliding the server backward, press the locks on both sides of the rails to unlock.
Before turning on the server, make sure that the top cover is attached.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.3 Installing a CPU
The server can have up to two CPUs by adding an optional CPU.
• Before installation or removal, turn off the server and all peripheral devices.
(pg.32)).
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or device failures.
• Do not install unauthorized third party CPUs. Doing so may cause failures.
• Do not use CPUs that differ in frequency or cache size. The system will not
start up.
• The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed. They
can be damaged by static electricity.
Before handling them, first touch a metal part of the server to discharge static
electricity.
• Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas
or the edges of the circuit boards.
7.3.1 Where to Install CPUs
CPU socket 0 is installed with a CPU by default. Install an additional CPU in CPU socket 1.
CPU
Socket 1
CPU
Socket 0
(Standard)
7
[Front]
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
7.3.2 Installable CPUs and Notes
■ Installable CPUs
The following CPUs can be installed on this server. The additional CPU must be the same model (with
the same frequency/cache size) as the existing CPU.
table: List of Installable CPUs
Product name
Model
PG-FG242
Remarks
For 3.0GHz/2MB
Processor Xeon™ 3.0GHz/2MB
Processor Xeon™ 3.2GHz/2MB
Processor Xeon™ 3.6GHz/2MB
PG-FG243
PG-FG244
For 3.2GHz/2MB
For 3.6GHz/2MB
■ Contents of the Optional CPU Package
Before installing the CPU, refer to "Appendix B.1 CPU Specifications" (ꢁpg.293) to check the contents
of the optional package.
■ Changing the OS
When adding a CPU to a one-CPU server with the Hyper-Threading function disabled, the OS must be
changed to the multi-processor kernel.
● For Windows
● For Linux
Customers using the Linux distribution OS are advised to refer to the following.
The Fujitsu PRIMERGY website:http://primergy.fujitsu.com
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.3.3 How to Install a CPU
This section explains how to install a CPU.
1
Turn the power off and remove the top cover.
2
3
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Remove the CPU duct (1) and then the socket cover (2).
CPU duct
1
2
Socket cover
4
Release the socket lever.
Slide the socket lever to the side and lift it slowly.
135°
Socket lever
7
• The socket lever turns appox. 135 degrees.
Be sure to turn the socket lever fully to release it. If the socket lever is not fully
open during installation, the CPU may be damaged.
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
5
Install the CPU.
1. Align the pin 1 marking (small triangle) on the CPU socket with the triangle on the
CPU, and insert the pins into the socket.
2. Return the socket lever to fasten the CPU.
1
2
Pin 1 marking
• When installing the CPU in the socket, be careful not to bend the CPU
pins.
6
Install the heat sink.
Install the heat sink in the direction so that the "FRONT" side comes to the front of the server.
Fasten it using the four screws.
Carefully tighten the screws in diagonal order.
Heat sink
[Front]
Indicated "FRONT"
ꢀ
Make sure that the four screws are tightened securely.
7
8
Return the CPU duct to the original position.
Install the top cover and return the server back into the rack.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
9
Initialize the Extended System Configuration Data (ESCD).
On the [Advanced] menu of the BIOS Setup Utility, set [Reset Configuration Data] to [Yes].
10 Store the BIOS settings.
■ How to Remove a CPU
To remove a CPU, simply reverse the installation procedures.
7.3.4 Defective CPU Disconnection Function
This server is equipped with the defective CPU disconnection function.
This function disconnects the CPU judged to be defective (abnormal) during Power On Self Test
(POST) to start the server. On two-CPU servers, if one CPU is defective, the other CPU starts up the
server.
The defective CPU can be checked with the information displayed during POST or the [CPU Status]
■ Removing the Defective CPU
ꢀ
to [Enabled].
If the item is set to [Failed] or [Disabled], change the setting to [Enabled].
If it is not set to [Enabled], the server will start with the CPU recognized as being defective and
constantly disconnected. To use the new CPU, set the item to [Enabled] for releasing the failed CPU
status at the next startup.
7
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
7.4 Installing Memory Modules
Additional memory will help to increase the amount of data to read at a time and
improve the server processing capability.
• Before installation or removal, turn off the server and all peripheral devices.
Turning Off the Server" (pg.32)). Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
• Do not install unauthorized third party memory modules. Doing so may cause
electric shock, a fire, or failures.
• Wait for a sufficient period of time after server shutdown before installing or
removing memory. Failure to do so may cause burns.
• When installing or removing memory modules, make sure to remove the
screws on the specified points only. Failure to do so may cause injury or device
failures.
• Touch only the specified part of the printed circuit board.
Failure to do so may cause injury or device failures.
• The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed. They
can be damaged by static electricity.
Before handling them, first touch a metal part of the server to discharge static
electricity.
• Do not insert and remove memory modules repeatedly. Doing so may cause
failures.
• Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas
or the edges of the circuit boards.
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.4.1 Where to Install the Memory Modules
Install memory modules in the memory slots on the baseboard.
One memory bank consists of Slots A and B on this server.
Memory SlotB1
Memory bank1
Memory SlotA1
Memory SlotB2
Memory SlotA2
Memory bank2
Memory SlotB3
Memory bank3
Memory SlotA3
Memory SlotB4
Memory bank4
Memory SlotA4
■ Installation Order
Use memory banks in order of bank 1, bank 2, bank 3, and bank 4 in order of larger capacity. Install by a
pair of memory modules having the same capacity in the memory bank.
7.4.2 Installable Memory Modules and Notes
■ Installable Memory Modules
The following memory module types can be used on this server.
table: List of Installable Memory Modules
7
Product name
Memory Module-1GB
Memory Module-2GB
Memory Module-4GB
Model
Remarks
512MB DIMM × 2
PG-RM1BC
PG-RM2BC
PG-RM4BC
1GB DIMM × 2
2GB DIMM × 2
■ Contents of the Optional Memory Package
the contents of the optional package.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
■ Notes on Installing Memory Modules
● Identifying Memory Modules
When installing memory modules check that the number beginning with "CA" (e.g., CA05946-E101)
printed on the label is identical on the two DIMMs. Be sure to install a pair of modules with the same
number.
If the DIMMs have identification labels, be sure to install a pair of DIMMs with the same capacity and
the label placed on the same location.
The figure below shows the identification label locations.
Identification label A
Identification label B
Identification label C
1
Check the identification labels in a position where the circled corner is on the left as shown in the above
figure. Identification labels are applied in any of the following patterns.
table: List of Identification Label Location Patterns
Pattern
Identification label A
Identification label B
Identification label C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-
A
-
-
-
-
-
A
-
-
-
A
-
A
A
-
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A: Label applied
-: Label not applied
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.4.3 How to Install/Remove Memory Modules
This section explains how to install/remove memory modules.
1
Turn the power off and remove the top cover.
2
3
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Install or remove memory modules.
• Installing
Insert a memory module properly into the memory slot. The levers close.
If the levers are not closed completely, push them with your fingers.
Check that the memory module is inserted all the way.
• Removing
Open the levers on both ends.
Align notch
Lever
• Make sure not to open the clips outward too quickly because the memory
module may pop up, which could cause damage.
4
Check that the memory module is inserted all the way.
7
• An improperly engaged memory module could cause a fire. Do not insert the
memory module on the wrong side.
5
6
Install the top cover and return the server back into the rack.
Initialize the Extended System Configuration Data (ESCD).
Data] to [Yes].
7
Store the BIOS settings.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
7.4.4 Defective Memory Disconnection Function
This server is equipped with the defective memory (RAM module) disconnection function.
This function disconnects the memory block judged to be defective (abnormal) during Power On Self
Test (POST) to start the server. When POST is executed, if the memory capacity is discovered to be
smaller than the capacity of the memory installed, there is a possibility of memory defect.
During POST or from the system event log, you can check the slot location that has defective memory.
If defective memory is discovered, replace it, and then restart the server.
■ Replacing the Defective Memory
Replace the defective memory with a new one according to "7.4.3 How to Install/Remove Memory
Modules" (ꢀpg.177).
ꢁ
Status Submenu" (ꢀpg.228) to check that [Memory Module nn] (nn is the number of the replaced
memory) is set to [Enabled].
If the item is set to [Failed] or [Disabled], change the setting to [Enabled]. If it is not set to [Enabled],
the server will start with the memory recognized as being defective and constantly disconnected.
To use the new memory, set the item to [Enabled] for releasing the failed memory status at the next
startup.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.5 Installing Expansion Cards
This section explains the types of expansion card, installation procedures, and notes
on expansion cards.
• Before installation, turn off the server and peripheral devices. Unplug the
power cables from the outlets. Failure to do so may cause electric shock
• The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed. They
can be damaged by static electricity.
Before handling them, first touch a metal part of the server to discharge static
electricity.
• Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas
or the edges of the circuit boards.
• Expansion cards are susceptible to static electricity. Place them on conductive
pads or keep them in their packaging as long as they are not necessary.
7.5.1 Where to Install an Expansion Card
This server has two PCI slots. Up to two PCI cards can be installed.
The figure below shows the slot locations.
PCISlot1
PCISlot2
7
[Rear]
■ PCI Slot Specifications
The table below shows the PCI slot specifications.
table: PCI Slot Specifications
PCI slot
Specifications
64-bit 133MHz, PCI-X
64-bit 66MHz
Remarks
1
2
For a full height, half length, or low profile PCI card
For a low profile PCI card
The PCI slots conform to the PCI local bus specifications (Rev. 2.2).
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
7.5.2 Installable Expansion Cards and Notes
This section explains expansion cards that can be installed on this server and provides notes on
installation.
■ Installable Expansion Cards
Up to two expansion cards listed on the following table can be installed in the server.
table: List of Installable Expansion Cards
Number
of cards
Installable expansion card (Model name)
Remarks
1
For external array systems
(Ultra320 SCSI x 2ch)
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB w/ BBU
(PG-142E3)
IB HCA Card (PG-HSC101)
1
1
1
Not supported in Windows
1000BASE-T
Eth. Ctrl 1000-BASE-T Cu (PG-1852)
Eth. Ctrl 2 x 1000-BASE-T Cu (PG-1862)*1
Fibre Channel Controller (PG-FC106)
1000BASE-T, Dual Port
1
2
2
1000BASE-SX, LowProfile
1000BASE-T, LowProfile
Eth. Ctrl 1000-BASE-SX Fibre LC lp (PG-
1882L)
2
2
Eth. Ctrl 1000-BASE-T Cu lp (PG-1892L)
SCSI Ctrl U160 lp (PG-130L)
For external SCSI devices
(Ultra160 SCSI, LowProfile)
1
Remote Service Board (PG-RSB103L)
*1: The Eth. Ctrl 2 x 1000-BASE-T Cu (PG-1862) cannot be installed together with other LAN cards.
■ Location and Order of Expansion Card Installation
For expansion cards, use the PCI slots in accordance with the order indicated in the following table.
Install cards in the following order. If they are installed in the wrong order, they will not work properly.
table: Installation Order and Slots for Expansion Cards
PCI slot
Installation
order
Installable expansion card (Model name)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128 MB w/ BBU (PG-142E3)
IB HCA Card (PG-HSC101)
-
-
Eth. Ctrl 1000-BASE-T Cu (PG-1852)
Eth. Ctrl 2 x 1000-BASE-T Cu (PG-1862)
Fibre Channel Controller (PG-FC106)
Eth. Ctrl 1000-BASE-SX Fibre LC lp (PG-1882L)
Eth. Ctrl 1000-BASE-T Cu lp (PG-1892L)
SCSI Ctrl U160 lp (PG-130L)
-
-
2
2
2
2
Remote Service Board (PG-RSB103)
-: Installation is impossible.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Notes on Installation
● Drivers
● Notes on Each Card
For notes of specific expansion cards, refer to the manuals supplied with the card and the notes provided
with the server. Also, check the following for respective expansion cards.
● SCSI Card/RAID Card
•
Connection of a SCSI device
Devices" (ꢀpg.201).
• Connect a SCSI device supported by this server to the SCSI or RAID card.
Operations of unsupported SCSI devices are not guaranteed.
● BIOS Settings
The expansion ROM for expansion cards is disabled on this server. To configure an expansion card, the
expansion ROM must be temporarily enabled in the BIOS Setup Utility. The configuration procedures
are as follows.
1
Enable the expansion ROM of the slot for the expansion card to be configured.
(ꢀpg.218) from the [Advanced] menu. Change [Option ROM Scan] from [Disabled] to
[Enabled].
2
From the "8.2.17 Exit Menu" (ꢀpg.232), select [Save Changes & Exit] to exit
the BIOS Setup Utility.
3
4
Restart the server and configure the expansion card in POST.
7
After configuring the expansion card, start up the BIOS Setup Utility again and
return the setting you have changed in Step 1 to the original setting.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
● Fibre Channel Controller
The CD-ROM drive unit may not be recognized at the next startup after installation of Fibre Channel
Controller (PG-FC106) in a Windows Server 2003 server. Perform the following steps, then it will be
recognized.
1
2
3
Click [Start] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer Management].
Click [Device Manager].
From the device list in the right pane of the window, select [DVD/CDROM
drive].
4
Select [Scan for Hardware Changes] from the [Action] menu.
● IB HCA Card
When installing an IB HCA Card (PG-HSC101), set the switches on the card as follows. This card is not
supported in Windows.
table: IB HCA Card Switch Settings
Setting
Switch No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW1
SW2
-
-
-
-
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
● Remote Service Board
•
Before installing a remote service board
For preparation and procedures for installing a remote service board, refer also to the manual
supplied with the board.
• Do not connect the remote service board AC adapter until you finish installing
the remote service board and close the top cover of the server. Doing so may
cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.
• When replacing remote service boards or adding other optional devices,
unplug the power cable of the remote service board AC adapter from the
outlet.
Failure to do so may cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.
• When the server is installed in an upper position in the rack, fasten the AC
adapter in the rack. If the AC adapter unit is suspended, excessive force can
be put on the cable, causing failures.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
•
Where to connect the remote service board control cable
Connect the internal power cable and server control cable supplied with the remote service board as
shown in the figure below.
[Rear]
Card locking frame
Remote Service Board
Server control cable
Internal power cable
Server control
Internal power
connector
connector
ꢀ
To use the remote service, be sure to install ServerView.
7.5.3 How to Install an Expansion Card
This section explains how to install an expansion card.
1
Turn the power off and remove the top cover.
2
3
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Loosen the screws on the rear of the server.
7
Screws
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
4
Remove the card locking frame.
1. Hold the card locking frame by both ends where green "LIFT UP" stickers are
applied.
2. Twist your wrists inward and lift the frame gently with your fingers.
ꢀ
Remove it carefully. Parts in the frame may come off.
Card locking frame
2
Gently lift upward
2
1
Green stickers (LIFT UP)
5
Remove the slot cover from the card locking frame.
Slot cover
ꢀ
The slot cover for PCI slot 1 is composed of a low profile slot cover and an extension slot
cover.
Extension
slot cover
Low profile
slot cover
ꢀ
Be sure to keep the removed slot cover for later use.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
6
When installing a low profile card in PCI slot 1, fasten the expansion card and
extension slot cover with the screw.
Use the screw that comes with the extension slot cover.
(This step is unnecessary for installing a full height expansion card.)
Expansion Card
(LowProfile)
Extension
Slot cover
7
Insert the expansion card securely into the PCI slot.
PCIslot2
Expansion Card
PCIslot1
7
ꢀ
When installing in both PCI slots 1 and 2, insert a card into slot 1 first.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
8
Turn the card locking frame over and align the connectors. Install the card
locking frame by pushing on the green "PUSH" sticker area, then tighten the
screws.
Green stickers (PUSH)
Card locking frame port
9
Attach the top cover and return the server back into the rack.
■ How to Remove an Expansion Card
procedures.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.6 Installing an Internal CD-ROM
Drive Unit
This section explains the procedure for installing a CD-ROM drive.
• Before installation or removal, turn off the server and all peripheral devices.
Also unplug all power cables from the server. Failure to do so may cause
• When installing a CD-ROM drive, hold it by the side.
Applying force to the top can cause failures.
• The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed. They
can be damaged by static electricity.
Before handling them, first touch a metal part of the server to discharge static
electricity.
• Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas
or the edges of the circuit boards.
7.6.1 Installable Internal CD-ROM Drive Units
■ Installable Internal CD-ROM Drive Units
The following internal CD-ROM drive unit can be installed on this server.
table: Installable Internal CD-ROM Drive Units
Product name
CD-ROM ATAPI
Model
PG-CD321
Remarks
■ Contents of the Optional Internal CD-ROM Drive Unit Package
7
Before installing the internal CD-ROM drive unit, refer to "Appendix B.3 Internal CD-ROM Drive Unit
Specifications" (ꢁpg.294) to check the contents of the optional package.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
7.6.2 How to Install an Internal CD-ROM Drive Unit
This section explains how to install an internal CD-ROM drive unit.
1
Turn the power off and remove the top cover.
2
3
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Release the latches on the top of the CD-ROM drive bay and remove the
dummy CD-ROM.
Press two latches
with a driver
Dummy CD-ROM
4
Insert the internal CD-ROM drive unit into the CD-ROM drive bay.
Internal CD-ROM drive unit
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
5
Connect the IDE and power cables.
Connect the IDE and power cables in the server into the connectors on the rear of the CD-ROM
drive.
Power cable
IDE cable
Connector
6
Attach the top cover and return the server back into the rack.
■ How to Remove an Internal CD-ROM Drive Unit
1
Turn the power off and remove the top cover.
2
3
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Remove the IDE and power cables.
Remove the IDE and power cables connected to the connector on the rear of the CD-ROM drive.
7
Power cable
IDE cable
Connector
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
4
Remove the internal CD-ROM drive unit.
Moving the lever in the direction of the arrow ejects the internal CD-ROM drive unit a little out
of the bay. Remove the drive unit.
Lever
Internal CD-ROM drive unit
5
6
Install the dummy CD-ROM or a new internal CD-ROM drive unit.
Attach the top cover and return the server back into the rack.
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.7 Installing an Internal Hard Disk
Unit
This section explains the procedure for installing internal hard disk units.
• The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed. They
can be damaged by static electricity. Before handling them, first touch a metal
part of the server to discharge static electricity.
• Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas
or the edges of the circuit boards.
• Before removing the unit, turn the power off and wait for about 30 seconds until
the disk stops completely.
• Hard disk units may generate resonant sound temporarily after startup. This
does not cause problems.
• In some operating systems, the write cache setting of the hard disk unit can be
changed. However, keep it disabled. If the write cache is enabled, the data in
the cache can be lost when a power failure occurs.
• When disposing of, transferring, or returning a hard disk unit, delete the data
stored in it by yourself. For repairs, contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
• Use the unit in a dry place with low airborne dust levels.
• Rough handling of the hard disk unit can damage the stored data. To cope with
any unexpected problems, always back up important data. When backing up
data to another hard disk unit, you should make backups on a file or block
basis.
• Take great care so that you do not hit the hard disk or bring it into contact with
metallic objects.
• Do not disassemble the hard disk unit.
• Use or store the unit on a shock-and-vibration free surface.
• Keep the device away from direct sunlight, radiators or other heat sources.
• Do not use or store the unit in a place where the temperature is extremely high
or low, or experiences extreme temperature changes.
7
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
7.7.1 Where to Install Internal Hard Disk Units
Install internal hard disk units in 3.5-inch storage bays in the front of the server.
■ Installation Order
The numbers and SCSI IDs of the 3.5-inch storage bays are as follows.
[Front]
CD-ROM(Option)
Bay2( ID=1)
FDD
PSU
(Option)
Bay1( ID=0)
Install the internal hard disk unit in bay 1 first, then bay 2.
■ SCSI-ID Setting
SCSI-ID setting is not required for the 3.5-inch storage bay.
These 3.5-inch storage bays use hot plugs. A Single Connector Attachment2 (SCA2) connector is used
as an interface with an internal hard disk unit. Integrated power and signal cable eliminated the need for
troublesome cable connection work.
7.7.2 Installable Internal Hard Disk Units
■ Installable Internal Hard Disk Units
The following internal hard disk units can be installed on this server.
table: List of Installable Internal Hard Disk Units
Product name
Model
Overview
HDD U320 15K 73GB hot plug 1"
73.4GB, 10,000rpm, Ultra320 SCSI
1 inch, supports hot plugs
PG-HDH71K
HDD U320 10K 147GB hot plug 1"
HDD U320 10K 300GB hot plug 1”
HDD U320 15K 73GB hot plug 1"
146.8GB, 10,000rpm, Ultra320 SCSI
1 inch, supports hot plugs
PG-HDH41K
PG-HDK31K
PG-HDH75K
300GB, 10,000rpm, Ultra320SCSI
1 inch, supports hot plugs
73.4GB, 15,000rpm, Ultra320 SCSI
1 inch, supports hot plugs
■ Contents of the Optional Internal Hard Disk Unit Package
Before installing the internal hard disk unit, refer to "Appendix B.4 Internal Hard Disk Unit
Specifications" (ꢀpg.294) to check the contents of the optional package.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Connections
The figure below shows the connection of internal hard disk units.
Bay1
SCSI ID: 0
Bay2
SCSI ID: 1
SCSI cable: Standard
Onboard SCSI connector
Baseboard
[Rear]
7.7.3 How to Install an Internal Hard Disk Unit
This section explains how to install an internal hard disk unit.
1
2
Open the rack door.
Turn off the server and peripheral devices, then unplug the power cables from
the server.
3
4
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Remove the dummy unit from the bay to accommodate an internal hard disk
unit.
A dummy unit is inserted into a bay not occupied by an internal hard disk unit. Pull the dummy
unit out towards you with the latches on both sides pressed inward.
7
Latches
ꢁ
Be sure to keep the removed dummy units for later use.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
5
Install the internal hard disk unit into the server.
With the handle on the internal hard disk unit in the raised position, insert the unit all the way into
the bay.
Handle
6
Push down the handle on the internal hard disk unit until it clicks into position.
Handle
■ How to Remove the Internal Hard Disk Unit
1
Open the rack door.
2
Turn off the server and peripheral devices, then unplug the power cables from
the server.
3
4
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Remove the internal hard disk unit.
With the front tab of the internal hard disk unit pressed, turn the handle upward (1) and pull the
hard disk unit towards you (2). To remove the internal hard disk unit, use both hands to pull it out.
1
Tab
Handle
2
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
5
Install a new internal hard disk unit or a dummy unit.
■ Replacing the Failed Internal Hard Disk Unit
When an array system (RAID1) is configured with the onboard SCSI array controller on this server, a
failed hard disk unit can be replaced and restoration can be performed without turning off the server and
peripheral devices (hot swappable/hot pluggable).
For details on the array system, refer to "Onboard SCSI RAID User's Guide".
The following is an outline of the procedure for replacing a failed internal hard disk unit.
1
2
3
4
Check the hard disk unit failure LED on each bay.
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Move the handle on the failed hard disk unit up and pull it a little towards you.
Wait for approximately 60 seconds (until the hard disk stops rotating) and pull
out the failed hard disk unit.
5
6
Install a new internal hard disk unit.
Rebuild the new internal hard disk unit.
For the rebuild procedure, refer to "Onboard SCSI RAID User's Guide".
7
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
7.8 Installing a Power Supply Unit
One power supply unit is installed in this server by default. Up to two units can be
installed.
When the server has two power supply units, the redundant power supply function is
enabled.
This section provides notes on adding a power supply unit and explains how to
install, remove, and replace it.
• Before installation or removal, turn off the server and all peripheral devices.
(pg.32)). Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
However, if the redundant power supply function is supported, you can replace
a failed power supply unit as the power remains turned on.
• When removing the power supply unit, do not insert your hand into the power
supply unit slot. Doing so may cause electric shock.
• The power supply unit is heavy. Handle it with care.
If it falls, it may cause injury.
ꢁ
Replace the failed power unit as soon as possible.
7.8.1 Where to Install the Power Supply Unit
Install the power supply unit in power supply unit slot 1.
Power supply unit 0
(Standard)
Power supply unit 1
[Front]
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.8.2 Installable Power Supply Unit
The following power supply unit can be installed on this server.
table: List of Installable Power Supply Units
Product name
Power Supply Module
Model
Remarks
PG-PU116
7.8.3 How to Install a Power Supply Unit
This section explains how to install a power supply unit.
• Areas around the power supply unit may be very hot. Turn off the power and
wait for a while before starting work.
1
2
Turn off the server and peripheral devices (ꢀ"1.4.3 Turning Off the Server"
(pg.32)). Unplug the power cable for the optional power supply unit from the
rear of the server.
Remove the power cable from the power supply unit in the front.
[Front]
Power cable
3
Remove the dummy unit while pressing the green lever.
Hold the handle on the dummy unit and pull it out.
7
Dummy unit
Handle
Green lever
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
4
Install the power supply unit.
Hold the power supply unit with both hands. Insert it straight into the power supply unit slot and
slide the unit slowly.
Power supply unit
5
6
Remove the protective sticker from the inlet.
This step is unnecessary for custom-made power supply units.
Plug the power cable of the power supply unit into the inlet.
Power cable
■ How to Remove the Power Supply Unit
1
Turn off the server and peripheral devices (ꢀ"1.4.3 Turning Off the Server"
(pg.32)). Unplug the power cable for the optional power supply unit from the
rear of the server.
2
3
Remove the power cable from the power supply unit in the front.
Remove the power supply unit while pressing the green lever.
Hold the handle on the power supply unit and pull the unit towards you. While pulling the unit
out, support it with the other hand.
4
5
Install a new power supply unit or a dummy unit.
Plug the power cable of the power supply unit into the inlet.
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.8.4 Replacing a Power Supply Unit when the Redundant
Function is Enabled
When the system power supply redundant function is enabled, a failed power supply unit can be
replaced without turning off the server.
After removing the power supply unit, be sure to install a new unit.
■ Power Supply Unit LED Status
Power supply unit LED
Green On: The unit is operating normally
Amber On: An AC power supply is connected
or an error is detected in the
power supply unit
■ Replacing the Power Supply Unit
1
2
Remove the power cable from the failed power supply unit.
Remove the failed power supply unit.
3
4
Install the new power supply unit.
Plug the power cable into the inlet of the new power supply unit.
7
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
7.9 Replacing System Fans
This server supports the redundant system fan function. Even if one of the system
fans fails, the system will continue to operate.
ServerView allows you to identify which system fan has failed. Contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
ꢁ
Replace the failed system fan as soon as possible.
■ System Fan Numbers
System Fan Numbers
9 7 5 3 1
8 6 4 2
11 10
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.10Connection of Optional Devices
This section explains connection of optional devices.
7.10.1 Connecting External SCSI Options
The following gives examples of external SCSI device connection. Note that each connection has
conditions.
■ Connection of a Backup Cabinet
Connect a backup cabinet as shown in the figure below.
[Server]
Backup cabinet
(PRIMERGY SX10:
PG-R1BC4)
SCSI Ctrl U160 lp
(PG-130L)
SCSI cable
(PG-CBLS007 / PG-CBLS008: Optional)
Baseboard
Internal Hard Disk Unit
■ Connection of a Hard Disk Cabinet to Configure a Large-capacity
Array System
Connect a hard disk cabinet as shown in the figure below.
[Server]
7
Hard disk cabinet
(PRIMERGY SX30:
PG-R1DC7)
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel
128MB w/ BBU (PG-142E3)
SCSI cable
( PG-CBLS004 / PG-CBLS005: Optional)
Baseboard
Internal Hard Disk Unit
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
■ Connection of Other External SCSI Options
External SCSI options with different SCSI-IDs are connected in a daisy chain as shown in the following
figure. Up to two devices can be connected.
<Server>
<External SCSI devices>
SCSI Ctrl U160 lp
SCSI Cable (GP5-846: Option)
SCSI Cable
(External SCSI devices content)
Terminator
(External SCSI devices content
or the auto termination function of the external SCSI device)
■ Notes on SCSI Options
● SCSI-ID Setting
Do not use the same setting for different devices.
● Terminator
Install a terminator to the external SCSI option at the end of the daisy chain.
Alternatively, use the auto termination function of the external SCSI option.
ꢀ
Be sure to use the terminator supplied with a SCSI device only on that option.
● SCSI Cable
Select the SCSI cable for connecting the SCSI device depending on usage.
table: List of SCSI Cables
Device connected
Model
Lengt
h
Remarks
Separately
available
External SCSI device
Server
External SCSI option
(half-pitch, 68-pin)
SCSI Ctrl U160 lp (PG-
130L)
(VHDCI, 68-pin)
GP5-846
2.0m
1.8m
5.0m
2.0m
5.0m
PRIMERGY SX10
(half-pitch, 68-pin)
SCSI Ctrl U160 lp (PG-
130L)
(VHDCI, 68-pin)
PG-CBLS007
PG-CBLS008
PG-CBLS004
PG-CBLS005
Separately
available
PRIMERGY SX10
(half-pitch, 68-pin)
SCSI Ctrl U160 lp (PG-
130L)
(VHDCI, 68-pin)
Separately
available
Hard disk cabinet PG-R1DC7
(VHDCI, 68-pin)
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128
MB w/ BBU (PG-142E3)
(VHDCI, 68-pin)
Separately
available
Hard disk cabinet PG-R1DC7
(VHDCI, 68-pin)
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128
MB w/ BBU (PG-142E3)
(VHDCI, 68-pin)
Separately
available
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
● Daisy Chain Connection
Daisy chain connection is impossible between devices with different SCSI interfaces. Use a SCSI card
for such devices.
DLT library device cannot be connected in a daisy chain.
7
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing Internal Options
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Jumper Settings
The jumper settings are as follows.
1
2
3
table: Jumper Settings
Contents
Setting at the
time of
purchase
Jumper
Setting
JP7
1-2
The server starts up with the normal BIOS
information.
S
-
2-3
The server starts up with the stored BIOS
information.
JP9
1-2
2-3
The information stored on the CMOS is retained.
The information stored on the CMOS is deleted.
S
-
S: Setting at the time of purchase
8
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
8.2 BIOS Setup Utility
This section explains settings for the BIOS Setup Utility and items regarding each setting.
8.2.1 Starting and Exiting the BIOS Setup Utility
The following explains how to start and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
■ How to Start the BIOS Setup Utility
1
Turn the server on.
2
After memory counting in POST, press the [F2] key when the message "Press
<F2> to enter SETUP <F12> to boot menu" is displayed on the screen.
The [Main] menu appears.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Advanced
Security
Server
Exit
System Time
[HH:MM:SS]
Item Specific Help
System Date:
[MM:DD:YYYY]
Diskette A:
[1.44/1.25 MB 31/2"]
[CD-ROM]
Primary Master
Boot Options
Base Memory
nnn KB
Extended Memory
nnnnn KB
-/+
Change Values
Select Sub-Menu F10
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
ꢁ
While the message "Press <F2> to enter SETUP <F12> to boot menu" is displayed after mem-
ory counting in POST, pressing the [F12] key causes the [Boot Menu] window to appear.
The [Boot Menu] window allows you to select the disk to boot next.
Boot Menu
1.
CD-ROM Drive
2. +Removable Devices
3. +Hard Drive
<Enter Setup>
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
● Key Operations in the BIOS Setup Utility
The roles of the keys used for using the BIOS Setup Utility are as follows.
table: List of Key Operations on the BIOS Setup Utility Window
Key
Role
Displays or hides detailed information.
[F1]
When a submenu window is displayed, exits it and returns to the previous menu.
When the menu window is displayed, displays the [Exit] menu.
[Esc]
[↑][↓]
Switches between menus.
[←][→]
[Enter]
Scrolls through the menu option list.
Selects a setting item or displays the submenu of that item.
When a submenu is displayed, pressing the [Esc] key returns to the menu window.
[-][+]
[F9]
Changes the value of an item.
Sets the items to the initial values (initial values may be different from the setting
values at the time of purchase).
Saves the settings and exits the BIOS Setup Utility.
[F10]
■ How to Exit the BIOS Setup Utility
1
Use the [←] and [→] keys to display the [Exit] menu.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Advanced Security Server Exit
Main
Save Changes & Exit
Discard Changes & Exit
Get Default Values
Load Previous Values
Save Changes
Item Specific Help
-/+
Change Values
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Select Menu
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Enter Execute Command
F10
8
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
2
Use the [↑] [↓] keys to select the exit mode.
• To save configuration changes before exiting.
Move the cursor to [Save Changes & Exit] and press the [Enter] key. The message "Save
configuration changes and exit now?" is displayed.
• To exit without saving configuration changes.
Move the cursor to [Discard Changes & Exit] and press the [Enter] key. The message
"Configuration has not been saved! Save before exiting?" is displayed.
3
Use the [←] and [→] keys to move the cursor to [Yes] or [No], and press the
[Enter] key.
• If you selected [Save Changes & Exit] from the [Exit] menu.
Select [Yes] to exit. After saving changes to settings, the BIOS Setup Utility closes and the
server restarts.
Select [No] to return to the BIOS Setup Utility.
• If you selected [Discard Changes & Exit] from the [Exit] menu.
Select [Yes] to save changes before exit. After saving changes to settings, the BIOS Setup
Utility closes and the server restarts.
Select [No] to exit without saving changes. The BIOS Setup Utility closes and the OS starts.
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.2.2 Main Menu
The [Main] menu window is initially displayed when you start the BIOS Setup Utility.
Settings for time and date and for the drives are configured in the [Main] menu window.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Advanced
Security
Server
Exit
System Time
[HH:MM:SS]
Item Specific Help
System Date:
[MM:DD:YYYY]
Diskette A:
[1.44/1.25 MB 31/2"]
[CD-ROM]
Primary Master
Boot Options
Base Memory
nnn KB
Extended Memory
nnnnn KB
-/+
Change Values
Select Sub-Menu F10
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
table: Items on the Main Menu
Setting
Item
System Time
Description
Present time
The system time is set in "hours:minutes:seconds"
format. The hours should be based on a 24-hour
clock.
For example, 6:30:00 P.M. is set as "18", "30",
"00".
Note:
ꢀ Repeat the procedure until the correct time
is set.
If a highly precise system time is necessary,
install a network synchronized time system
(NTP, etc.).
System Date
The system date is set in "month:day:year" format.
For example, August 20, 2005 is set as "08", "20",
"2005".
Present date
1.44/1.25MB 3 1/2" (Fixed
parameter)
Sets the type of floppy disk drive A (recording
density and drive size).
Diskette A
8
Primary Master
Sets the type and operating mode for the connected
internal hard disk unit.
[Enter]
Boot Options
[Enter]
Sets system startup options.
-
-
Available base memory size of up to 1MB is
displayed.
Base Memory
Memory size of 1MB or more is displayed.
Extended Memory
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
8.2.3 Primary Master Submenu
Appears when [Primary Master] is selected from the [Main] menu.
Sets the type and operating mode for the connected internal hard disk unit.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Primary Master [CD-ROM]
[Auto]
Item Specific Help
Type:
Transfers mode:
LBA Translation:
PIO Mode:
Ultra DMA Mode:
[Disabled]
[Disabled]
[FPIO 4 / DMA 2]
[Enabled]
32 Bit I/O:
[Mode 2]
-/+
Change Values
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
Select Sub-Menu F10
table: Items on the Primary Master Submenu
Setting
Item
Description
Type
Auto (Fixed parameter)
Sets the type of the IDE device.
Transfers Mode
LBA Translation
When [Type] is set to [Auto], displays the number
of sectors detected and transferred at once by the
server.
Disabled (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether to enable or disable the LBA (Logical
Block Addressing: access based on logical serial
numbers).
Disabled (Fixed parameter)
FPIO 4/DMA 2 (Fixed
parameter)
Sets the PIO (Programmed I/O) data transfer mode.
PIO Mode
32 Bit I/O
Specifies the bus width for data transfer between
the CPU and the IDE controller.
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
Mode2 (Fixed parameter)
Sets the DMA (Direct Memory Access) data
transfer mode.
Ultra DMA Mode
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.2.4 Boot Options Submenu
Appears when [Boot Options] is selected from the [Main] menu.
Sets system startup options.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Boot Options
Item Specific Help
POST Errors:
Keyboard Check:
SM Error Halt:
Quick Boot:
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
[Disabled]
[Disabled]
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
Quiet Boot:
Memory Testing:
Boot Menu:
Boot Sequence
MultiBoot for HDs:
[Enabled]
-/+
Change Values
Select Sub-Menu F10
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
table: Items on the Boot Options Submenu
Setting
Item
Description
POST Errors
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether or not to stop the boot process and
shut down the system, in case a POST (Power On
Self Test) error is detected.
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to check for a keyboard during
POST.
Keyboard Check
SM Error Halt
Disabled (Fixed parameter) Sets the procedure in case an error occurs regarding
the fan or temperature sensor.
Quick Boot
Quiet Boot
Sets whether or not to run POST in short mode.
Disabled (Fixed parameter)
Disabled (Fixed parameter) Sets whether or not to display the logo screen
instead of POST information.
Memory Testing
Sets whether or not to check the memory during
POST.
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether to enable or disable the boot menu.
Boot Menu
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
[Enter]
Boot Sequence
Sets the order of selected drives to boot the OS.
8
ꢁ"■ Boot Sequence Submenu" (pg.214)
Sets whether or not it is possible to specify the
order of hard disks to boot the OS when multiple
hard disk units are installed.
MultiBoot for HDs
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
■ Boot Sequence Submenu
Sets the order of selected drives to boot the OS.
table: Items on the Boot Sequence Submenu
Item
Description
(The boot order is described.)
• CD-ROM Drive
• Removable Devices
• Hard Drive
• [+] [-] keys: Changes the order of priority for the selected device.
• [Ctrl] + [Enter] keys: Displays detailed information on all devices indicated
with "+".
• [Shift] + [1] keys: Enable or disable booting from the selected device.
• [Enter] key: Displays detailed information on the selected device indicated
with "+", or hides such information when the selected device is indicated with
"-".
• LSI MPI Boot Support
• IBA GE Slot 0330 v1220
• IBA GE Slot 0331 v1220
• [LSI MPI Boot Support] can be displayed or changed when [Option ROM
Scan] on the "■ PCI Device, Embedded LSI SCSI 1020 Submenu"
[Advanced] menu is set to [Enabled].
• [IBA GE Slot 0330 v1220] and [IBA GE Slot 0331 v1220] can be displayed
or changed when [Option ROM Scan] of [PCI Device, Embedded Ethernet 1/
2] on the "■ Ethernet on Board Submenu" (ꢁpg.218) displayed from the
[PCI Configuration] submenu of the [Advanced] menu is set to [Enabled].
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.2.5 Advanced Menu
Configures peripheral and PCI devices.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Advanced Security Server Exit
Main
Item Specific Help
Setup Warning
values may cause your system to malfunction.
Setting items on this menu to incorrect
Peripheral Configuration
PCI Configuration
Advanced System Configuration
Power On/Off
Reset Configuration Data:
[No]
Secured Setup Configurations:
Multiprocessor Specification:
[Disabled]
[1.4]
Large Disk Access Mode:
[DOS]
-/+
Change Values
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
Select Sub-Menu F10
table: Items on the Advanced Menu
Setting
Item
Description
Peripheral Configuration
[Enter]
Configures the serial port, parallel port, etc.
(pg.216)
PCI Configuration
[Enter]
[Enter]
Configures the PCI device.
Advanced System
Configuration
Configures additional settings.
Power On/Off
[Enter]
Configures power On/Off settings.
Reset Configuration Data
• Yes
• No (at the time of
purchase)
Sets the initialization of the Extended System
Configuration Data (ESCD) where the system
resources are recorded.
This setting is changed to [No] whenever the
system is restarted.
Secured Setup
Configurations
Sets whether or not to reject setting changes made
by the Plug&Play OS.
Disabled (Fixed parameter)
1.4 (Fixed parameter)
8
Sets the version of the multiprocessor to use.
Multiprocessor
Specification
Large Disk Access Mode
DOS (Fixed parameter)
Sets the hard disk access type supporting large-
capacity hard disk drives.
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
8.2.6 Peripheral Configuration Submenu
Appears when [Peripheral Configuration] is selected from the [Advanced] menu.
Configures the serial port, parallel port, etc.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Advanced
Peripheral Configuration
[Auto]
Item Specific Help
Serial:
Serial Multiplexer:
Floppy Type:
[System]
[Local]
Diskette Controller:
Mouse Controller:
[Enabled]
[Auto Detect]
-/+
Change Values
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
Select Sub-Menu F10
table: Items on the Peripheral Configuration Submenu
Setting Description
Item
Serial
• Disabled
• Enabled
Sets whether to enable or disable the serial port.
• Auto (at the time of
purchase)
• System (at the time of
purchase)
• BMC
Changes the function of the serial port.
• System
Serial Multiplexer
Uses as a serial port. (Setting for UPS
connection)
• Shared
• BMC
Enables the remote control function.
This value can be selected when [Serial] is set to
[Disabled].
• Shared
[System] can be switched to and from [BMC]
automatically. The remote control function and
console redirection can be used together.
Sets when the internal floppy disk drive is used.
Floppy Type
Local (Fixed parameter)
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether to enable or disable the floppy disk
controller.
Diskette Controller
• Disabled
• Enabled
Mouse Controller
Sets whether or not to use the mouse connected to
the mouse connector.
• Auto Detect (at the time of
purchase)
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.2.7 PCI Configuration Submenu
Appears when [PCI Configuration] is selected from the [Advanced] menu.
Configures the PCI device.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Advanced
PCI Configuration
Ethernet on Board
Item Specific Help
PCI Device, Embedded LSI SCSI 1020
PCI IRQ Configuration
PCI Slots Configuration
-/+
Change Values
Select Sub-Menu F10
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
table: Items on the PCI Configuration Submenu
Setting Description
Item
Ethernet on Board
Configures the LAN controller on the baseboard.
[Enter]
ꢁ"■ Ethernet on Board Submenu" (pg.218)
PCI Device, Embedded LSI
SCSI 1020
Configures the SCSI controller on the baseboard.
ꢁ"■ PCI Device, Embedded LSI SCSI 1020
[Enter]
Sets PCI IRQ assignment for the PCI slots.
PCI IRQ Configuration
PCI Slots Configuration
[Enter]
[Enter]
ꢁ"■ PCI IRQ Configuration Submenu" (pg.218)
Configures the PCI slots.
ꢁ"■ PCI SLOTS Configuration Submenu"
8
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
■ Ethernet on Board Submenu
Configures the LAN controller on the baseboard.
Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 have the same setting values.
table: Items on the Ethernet on Board Submenu
Item
Setting
Description
Ethernet on Board
Sets whether to enable or disable the LAN
controller on the baseboard.
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
Option ROM Scan
Latency Timer
• Disabled (at the time of
purchase)
• Enabled
Sets whether or not to initialize the extended ROM.
0040h (Fixed parameter)
Sets the minimum guarantee time in the PCI bus
clock unit for the PCI bus master method.
■ PCI Device, Embedded LSI SCSI 1020 Submenu
Configures the SCSI controller on the baseboard.
table: Items on the PCI Device, Embedded LSI SCSI 1020 Submenu
Item
Setting
Description
Device
Sets whether to enable or disable the SCSI
controller on the baseboard.
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
Option ROM Scan
Latency Timer
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to initialize the extended ROM.
0040h (Fixed parameter)
Sets the minimum guarantee time in the PCI bus
clock unit for the PCI bus master method.
■ PCI IRQ Configuration Submenu
Sets PCI IRQ assignment for the PCI slots.
table: Items on the PCI IRQ Configuration Submenu
Item
Setting
Description
PCI IRQ Line 0/VGA
Sets a PCI IRQ for the VGA controller on the
baseboard.
Auto (Fixed parameter)
■ PCI SLOTS Configuration Submenu
Configures the PCI slots. PCI Slot 1 and PCI Slot 2 have the same setting values.
table: Items on the PCI SLOTS Configuration Submenu
Item
Setting
Description
Option ROM Scan
• Disabled (at the time of
purchase)
• Enabled
Sets whether or not to initialize the extended
ROM. For notes on settings, refer to "7.5.2
Installable Expansion Cards and Notes"
(ꢁpg.180).
Latency Timer
0040h (Fixed parameter)
Sets the minimum guarantee time in the PCI bus
clock unit for the PCI bus master method.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.2.8 Advanced System Configuration Submenu
Appears when [Advanced System Configuration] is selected from the [Advanced] menu.
Configures additional settings.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Advanced
Advanced System Configuration
CPU Settings:
Item Specific Help
USB 1.1 Host Controller:
USB 2.0 Host Controller:
USB BIOS Legacy Support:
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
BIOS Work Space Location: [Top of Base Memory]
Memory Redundancy
: [Disabled]
-/+
Change Values
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
Select Sub-Menu F10
table: Items on the Advanced System Configuration Submenu
Setting Description
Configures the CPUs.
Item
CPU Settings
[Enter]
ꢁ"■ CPU Settings Submenu" (pg.220)
USB Host 1.1 Controller
USB Host 2.0 Controller
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to use the USB host controller
(2.0 or 1.1).
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether to enable or disable a USB-compatible
keyboard in an MS-DOS environment.
This item can be set when [USB Host 1.1
Controller] is set to [Enabled].
USB BIOS Legacy Support
BIOS Work Space Location Top of Base Memory
Memory Redundancy
Selects the BIOS work space.
Disabled (Fixed parameter) This server cannot use this.
8
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
■ CPU Settings Submenu
Configures the CPUs.
table: Items on the CPU Settings Submenu
Item
Setting
Description
CPU Mismatch Detection
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether to enable or disable the CPU clock
frequency checking.
Hyper-Threading
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to run one CPU as a dual-
processing CPU.
The setting [Enabled] may enhance processing
performance by allowing maximum use of the CPU
resources.
Note:
ꢀ Some operating systems and applications
do not support the Hyper-Threading
function.
ꢀ When you change the [Hyper-Threading]
setting from [Disabled] to [Enabled] on a
one-CPU server, you have to change the OS
to the multi-processor kernel. Refer to "9.8
Changing OS Settings" (ꢁpg.281). This
change is performed automatically on
Windows Server 2003.
Fast String operations
Compatible FPU Code
Split Lock operations
Adjacent Sector Prefetch
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
Disabled (Fixed parameter)
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
Configures the CPU internal setting.
CPU Thermal Management Enhanced (Fixed
parameter)
Configures the CPU internal setting.
This item is displayed only when using the optional
3.6GHz CPU.
CPU Halt Mode (C1E)
Enhanced SpeedStep
Standard (Fixed parameter) Configures the CPU internal setting.
Disabled (Fixed parameter) Configures the CPU internal setting.
This item is displayed only when using the optional
3.6GHz CPU.
NX Memory Protection
Disabled (Fixed parameter) Configures the CPU internal setting.
Note:
ꢀ Do not set this item to [Enabled] when the
Linux OS is used.
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.2.9 Power On/Off Submenu
Appears when [Power On/Off] is selected from the [Advanced] menu. Configures power On/Off
settings.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Advanced
Power On/Off
Item Specific Help
Power On Source
Resume On Times:
Resume Time:
LAN:
Remote:
[Enabled]
[Off]
[Enabled]
[00:00:00]
Power Failure Recovery:[Previous State]
-/+
Change Values
Select Sub-Menu F10
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
table: Items on the Power On/Off Submenu
Setting
Item
Description
Remote
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not the power can be turned on
when the modem (connected to the serial port)
receives a ring signal.
Resume On Times
• Off (at the time of
purchase)
• On
Sets whether or not to resume from suspend mode
at the specified time.
Resume Time
LAN
-
Specifies the time to resume in the 24-hour
"hours:minutes:seconds" format.
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to enable the power to be turned
on via LAN.
Power Failure Recovery
• Always ON
• Always OFF
Sets the server power status after system down due
to power failure or after power recovery by the
UPS.
• Previous State
(at the time of purchase)
Note:
ꢀ Set this item to [Always ON] when a UPS is
used.
8
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
8.2.10Security Menu
Configures the security features.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Advanced
Security
Server
Exit
Item Specific Help
Setup Password
System Password
Not installed
Not installed
Set Setup Password:
Set System Password:
Setup Password Lock:
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Standard]
System Password Mode: [System]
SETUP prompt:
Virus Warning:
System Load:
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
[Standard]
Diskette Write:
[Enabled]
Flash Write:
[Enabled]
-/+
Change Values
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
Select Sub-Menu F10
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
table: Items on the Security Menu
Setting
Item
Description
Setup Password/
System Password
-
Displays whether or not each password is set.
[Not installed] appears when the password is not
set, and [Installed] appears when it is set.
Set Setup Password
Set System Password
[Enter]
Sets a setup password. The setup password prevents
unauthorized startup of the BIOS Setup Utility.
For procedures for setting, changing, and deleting
the password, refer to "9.4.2 Security against
[Enter]
Sets a system password. The system password
prevents unauthorized access to the system.
A setup password must be specified.
For procedures for setting, changing, and deleting
the password, refer to "9.4.2 Security against
Setup Password Lock
• Standard (at the time of
purchase)
• Extended
Sets the scope protected by the setup password.
A setup password must be specified.
• Standard
You will be requested to enter the setup password
while the BIOS Setup Utility is starting up.
• Extended
You will be requested to enter the setup password
when the BIOS Setup Utility starts up. The BIOS
for the expansion cards is locked during POST.
System Password Mode
SETUP prompt
System
Sets the scope protected by the system password. A
setup password and a system password must be
specified.
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to display a setup message
"<F2> BIOS Setup" in the [POST] window when
the system restarts.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
table: Items on the Security Menu
Setting
Item
Virus Warning
Description
Disabled (Fixed parameter) Sets whether or not to check for changes in the boot
sector of the hard disk drive after the previous
system startup. If the boot sector is changed without
a clear reason, it is necessary to scan the system for
computer viruses with a virus detection program.
System Load
• Standard (at the time of
purchase)
• Diskette/CDROM Lock
Sets whether to enable or disable system startup
from a floppy disk or CD-ROM.
This setting is possible when a setup password is
specified.
Diskette Write
Flash Write
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether to enable or disable write protect on a
floppy disk.
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether to enable or disable write protect in
the system BIOS.
8
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
8.2.11Server Menu
Configures the server settings.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Advanced
Security
Server
Exit
Item Specific Help
O/S Boot Timeout:
Mode
[Disabled]
[Continue]
[0]
Timeout value
ASR&R Boot Delay(min):
Power Cycle Delay:
Boot Retry Counter:
Diagnostic System:
[2]
[5]
[3]
[Disabled]
Critical Temperature Monitoring:[Disabled]
Memory scrub:
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
[5]
BIOS runtime logging:
Clear Screen Delay(sec):
IPMI
CPU Status
Memory Status
LAN Setting
Console Redirection
-/+
Change Values
Select Sub-Menu F10
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
table: Items on the Server Menu
Setting
Item
O/S Boot Timeout
Description
• Disabled (at the time of
purchase)
• Enabled
Sets whether to enable or disable the OS Boot
Monitoring function, when ServerView is installed to
the OS.
If for some reason booting the operating system is
interrupted when this function is enabled, the system
will automatically restart.
The OS Boot Monitoring function can also be
enabled or disabled from ServerView.
Note:
ꢀ If ServerView is not installed to the OS, be
sure to set to [Disabled].
If the setting is enabled, the server may
automatically turn off or restart unexpectedly.
Even when ServerView is installed on the OS,
if starting the system while the Server
Management Tools disk is inserted, be sure to
disable the OS Boot Monitoring function.
If the system is started with this function
enabled, the server may automatically turn off
or restart improperly.
If the OS Boot Monitoring function is needed,
it should be reset to enabled before resuming
normal server operation.
When setting this function, refer to
"ServerView User's Guide" to fully learn about
its specifications, in order to use it properly
with the correct settings.
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
table: Items on the Server Menu
Setting
Item
Description
Mode
• Continue (at the time of Sets the operation to be performed when a timeout
purchase)
• Reset
• Power Cycle
occurs during OS boot monitoring.
• Continue: The boot sequence is continued.
• Reset: The server restarts automatically and starts
POST.
• Power Cycle: The server turns off automatically.
The server turns on automatically after the time
specified in [Power cycle Delay].
Timeout Value
•
•
0 (at the time of
purchase)
1-100
When [O/S Boot Timeout] is set to [Enabled], the
system restarts automatically if the OS fails to start
up within the time set for this item.
ASR&R Boot Delay (min)
• 2 (at the time of
purchase)
• 1-30
Sets the standby time for startup after shutdown due
to trouble (such as overheating) in minutes. The
system restarts after the set standby time.
Power Cycle Delay
Boot Retry Counter
5 (Fixed parameter)
Sets the time until the server is turned on after it is
turned off.
• 3 (at the time of
purchase)
• 0-7
Sets the maximum number of OS startup retries.
Diagnostic System
Disabled (Fixed
parameter)
Sets the operation to be performed when the number
of system boot retries exceeds the number specified
in [Boot Retry Counter].
Critical Temperature
Monitoring
Disabled (Fixed
parameter)
Sets whether or not to turn the power off in the event
of abnormal temperature.
Memory scrub
Enabled (Fixed parameter) Sets whether or not the BIOS detects and corrects
memory errors.
BIOS runtime logging
Clear Screen Delay (sec)
Enabled (Fixed parameter) Sets whether or not the CPU, memory, or PCI slot
errors are recorded in the error log.
• 5 (at the time of
purchase)
• 0-31
Sets the time (seconds) to display the last BIOS
message screen before the OS starts up.
IPMI
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
Configures the Baseboard Management Controller
(BMC).
CPU Status
Displays whether or not to allow the use of the
installed CPU.
Memory Status
LAN Setting
Console Redirection
Sets whether or not to allow the use of the installed
memory.
8
Sets the LAN for remote operations with Remote
Control Service.
Configures detailed settings for console redirection.
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
8.2.12IPMI Submenu
Appears when [IPMI] is selected from the [Server] menu.
Configures the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC).
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Server
Item Specific Help
IPMI
IPMI Specification Version
n.n
BMC Firmware
n.nn.nnnnnnnn
[Disabled]
[Overwrite]
nnn
Clear System Event Log
Event Log Full Mode
Existing Event Log number
Remaining Event Log number
nnn
System Event Log
System Event Log (list mode)
Real-time Sensor Data
-/+
Change Values
Select Sub-Menu F10
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
table: Items on the IPMI Submenu
Setting
Item
Description
IPMI Specification Version
BMC Firmware
-
-
Displays the IPMI Specification version.
Displays the BMC Firmware version.
Clear System Event Log
• Disabled (at the time of
purchase)
• Enabled
Deletes the logs stored in the system event log.
Event Log Full Mode
• Overwrite (at the time of Set the operation to be performed when the system
purchase)
• Maintain
event log becomes full.
• Overwrite: Logs are overwritten in old to new
order.
• Maintain: Existing logs are maintained. No new
logs are recorded.
Note:
ꢀ Before changing the setting for this item, be
sure to use [Clear System Event Log] to
delete the system event log.
Existing Event Log number
-
-
Displays the number of recorded logs.
Remaining Event Log
number
Displays the number of logs that can be recorded.
System Event Log
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
Displays the contents of the system event log.
For details on contents, refer to "9.3 System Event
System Event Log
(list mode)
Lists the contents of the system event log.
For details on contents, refer to "9.3 System Event
Real-time Sensor Data
Displays temperature and voltage sensor data.
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.2.13CPU Status Submenu
Appears when [CPU Status] is selected from the [Server] menu.
This submenu sets whether or not to allow the use of the installed CPU.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Server
CPU Status
[Enabled]
Item Specific Help
CPU 0 Status:
CPU 1 Status:
[Enabled]
-/+
Change Values
Select Sub-Menu F10
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
table: Items on the CPU Status Submenu
Setting
Item
Description
CPU 0 Status
CPU 1 Status
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
• Disabled
Sets whether or not to allow the use of CPUs
installed in the CPU sockets.
This must not be set to [Disabled] or [Failed].
• Failed
8
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
8.2.14Memory Status Submenu
Appears when [Memory Status] is selected from the [Server] menu.
This submenu sets whether or not to allow the use of the installed memory.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Server
Memory Status
Item Specific Help
ChannelA
DIMM A1:
DIMM A2:
DIMM A3:
DIMM A4:
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
ChannelB
DIMM B1:
DIMM B2:
DIMM B3:
DIMM B4:
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
-/+
Change Values
Select Sub-Menu F10
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
table: Items on the Memory Status Submenu
Setting
Item
Description
DIMM A1
DIMM A2
DIMM A3
DIMM A4
DIMM B1
DIMM B2
DIMM B3
DIMM B4
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
• Disabled
Sets whether or not to allow the use of memory in
Memory Slots A1 to B4.
For memory slot locations, refer to "7.4.1 Where to
This must not be set to [Disabled] or [Failed].
• Failed
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.2.15LAN Setting Submenu
Appears when [LAN Setting] is selected from the [Server] menu.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Server
Console Redirection
Item Specific Help
local IP Address:
[nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn]
[nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn]
[nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn]
Subnet Mask:
Gateway Address:
User ID 1 Password
[
]
-/+
Change Values
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
Select Sub-Menu F10
table: Items on the LAN Setting Submenu
Setting
Item
Description
local IP Address
Subnet Mask
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
-
Enter the IP address.
Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway Address
User ID 1 Password
Enter the gateway address.
This server cannot use this.
8
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
8.2.16 Console Redirection Submenu
Appears when [Console Redirection] is selected from the [Server] menu.
This submenu configures detailed settings for console redirection.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Server
Console Redirection
Item Specific Help
Console Redirection Port:
[Disabled]
Serial
Port:
Media Type:
[Serial]
Console connection:
Baud Rate
[Direct]
[9600]
Protocol:
[VT100+]
Flow Control
Mode:
[None]
[Enhanced]
-/+
Change Values
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Select Menu Enter
Select Sub-Menu F10
table: Items on the Console Redirection Submenu
Item
Setting
Description
Console Redirection Port
• Disabled (at the time of
purchase)
• Enabled
Sets whether to enable or disable console
redirection.
Port
Serial
Displays the serial port to be used for console
redirection.
This item appears when [Console Redirection Port]
is set to [Enabled].
Media Type
• Serial (at the time of
purchase)
• LAN
Sets the connection type for console redirection.
This item appears when [Console Redirection Port]
is set to [Enabled].
• Serial
Console redirection is performed via the serial
port.
• LAN
Console redirection is performed via the LAN.
Console connection
Direct (Fixed parameter)
Specifies the method of connection with the
console.
This item appears when [Console Redirection Port]
is set to [Enabled].
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
table: Items on the Console Redirection Submenu
Item
Setting
Description
Baud Rate
• 300
• 1200
• 2400
Sets the baud rate for console redirection.
This item appears when [Console Redirection Port]
is set to [Enabled].
• 9600 (at the time of
purchase)
• 19.2K
• 38.4K
• 57.6K
• 115.2K
Protocol
• VT100
Sets the console type for console redirection.
This item appears when [Console Redirection Port]
is set to [Enabled].
• VT100, 8 bits
• PC-ANSI, 7 bits
• PC-ANSI
• VT100+ (at the time of
purchase)
• VT-UTF8
Flow Control
Mode
• None (at the time of
purchase)
Sets the flow control.
This item appears when [Console Redirection Port]
is set to [Enabled].
• XON/XOFF
• CTS/RTS
• Standard
• Enhanced (at the time of
purchase)
Sets the range of use for console redirection.
This item appears when [Console Redirection Port]
is set to [Enabled].
8
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
8.2.17Exit Menu
Exits BIOS Setup.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Advanced Security Server Exit
Main
Save Changes & Exit
Discard Changes & Exit
Get Default Values
Load Previous Values
Save Changes
Item Specific Help
-/+
Change Values
Info
Exit
F1
Select Item
Select Menu
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
Esc
Enter Execute Command
F10
table: Items on the Exit Menu
Description
Item
Save Changes & Exit
Saves the current settings on the CMOS and exits the BIOS Setup Utility. The
server restarts at the same time.
Discard Changes & Exit
Exits the BIOS Setup Utility without saving current settings. Previously saved
settings remain valid.
Get Default Values
Loads and displays the default settings for the server.
Load Previous Values
Loads and displays the settings that were enabled when the BIOS Setup Utility
started up.
Save Changes
Save the settings on the CMOS.
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.3 SCSI Setup Utility
This section explains settings for the SCSI Setup Utility and items regarding each
setting. When an array is configured with the onboard SCSI array controller, settings
in the SCSI Setup Utility must be made.
8.3.1 Starting and Exiting the SCSI Setup Utility
The following explains how to start and exit the SCSI Setup Utility.
■ How to Start the SCSI Setup Utility
1
During server startup (POST), press the [Ctrl] + [C] keys while the message
"Press Ctrl-C to Start LSI Logic Configuration Utility..." is displayed on the
screen.
The [Main] menu appears.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility
Version
MPTBIOS-IMx.xx.xx
Header
<Boot Adapter List> <Global Properties>
LSI Logic Host Bus Adapters
Adapter
<1020/1030 3
PCI
Dev/
Func
28>
Port
IRQ
10
NVM
Yes
Boot
Order
0
LSI Logic RAID
Bus
Number
3000
Control
Enabled
Status
--
List area
Esc=Abort/Exit
F2=Menu
ArrowKeys=Select Item
Home/End=Select Item
-/+=Change[Item]
Enter=Execute<Item>
2
Select the menu or adapter to be configured.
• Pressing the [Esc] key moves the cursor from the header to the adapter list area.
Use the [←] and [→] keys to select between [Boot Adapter List] and [Global Properties].
• Pressing the [F2] key moves the cursor from the list area to the header. When you move the
cursor for the first time, press the [F2] key twice.
8
Use the [↑] and [↓] keys to select the adapter to be configured.
3
4
Press the [Enter] key.
The selected menu appears.
Configure menus and adapters.
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
● Key Operations in the SCSI Setup Utility
table: List of Key Operations on the SCSI Setup Utility Window
Key
Role
[↑] [↓] [←] [→]
[+] [–]
Moves the cursor to the item to set.
[Home]
[End]
Moves the cursor to the top item on the screen.
Moves the cursor to the bottom item on the screen.
[Enter]
Selects an item. When the item has a submenu, the submenu is
displayed.
[Esc]
[F2]
Moves to the [Exit] window from the [Main] menu, or to the
previous screen from other menus.
Moves the cursor to the main menu.
ꢀ
When you have changed settings in the SCSI Setup Utility, write down the setting items or print
screenshots with changed setting.
■ How to Exit the SCSI Setup Utility
1
Returns to the [Main] menu.
Pressing the [Esc] key in a menu window displays a confirmation message for saving the
changes. Perform either of the following.
• To save the current settings
Select [Save changes then exit this menu] and press the [Enter] key.
• To discard the current settings
Select [Discard changes then exit this menu] and press the [Enter] key.
2
Press the [Esc] key.
The [Exit] window appears.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility
Version
MPTBIOS-IMx.xx.xx
Are you sure you want to exit?
<Cancel Exit>
<Exit the Configuration Utility>
Save changes then exit this menu
Discard changes then exit this menu
Esc=Abort/Exit
ArrowKeys=Select Item
Home/End=Select Item
-/+=Change[Item]
Enter=Execute<Item>
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
• To exit the SCSI Setup Utility
Select [Exit the Configuration Utility] and press the [Enter] key.
The SCSI Setup Utility closes and the system restarts.
• To return to the [Main] menu
Select [Cancel Exit] and press the [Enter] key.
• To save the current settings
Select [Save changes then exit this menu] and press the [Enter] key.
• To discard the current settings
Select [Discard changes then exit this menu] and press the [Enter] key.
To configure an optional SCSI card or SCSI devices on the SCSI bus
ꢀ
ꢀ
For information on the SCSI card utility, refer to the manual for the card.
In the SCSI Setup Utility, configure each SCSI bus.
8
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
8.3.2 Main Menu
This section explains items on the [Main] menu.
The [Main] menu has three submenus. To select a submenu, move the cursor to the submenu and press
the [Enter] key.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility
Version
MPTBIOS-IMn.nn.nn
<Boot Adapter List> <Global Properties>
LSI Logic Host Bus Adapters
Adapter
<LSI1030
PCI
Bus
1
Dev/
Func
18>
Port
IRQ
9
NVM
Yes
Boot
Order
0
LSI Logic RAID
Number
2000
Control
Enabled
Status
--
Esc=Abort/Exit
F2=Menu
ArrowKeys=Select Item
Home/End=Select Item
-/+=Change[Item]
Enter=Execute<Item>
table: Items on the Main Menu
Description
Item
Boot Adapter List
Configures startups from the SCSI adapter.
Global Properties
Configures SCSI BOIS operation during POST.
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
table: Items on the Main Menu
Description
Item
SCSI adapter
names
Selecting an adapter name displays the submenu for setting detailed configuration
information of the SCSI adapter on the SCSI bus.
Adapter
PCI Bus
Displays the name of the SCSI adapter.
Displays the number of the PCI bus where the SCSI adapter is
connected.
Dev/Func
Displays the PCI device/function of the SCSI adapter.
Port Number
Displays the I/O port address of the SCSI adapter. On this server,
"2000/2001" is displayed.
IRQ
Displays the IRQ (IRQ level) of the SCSI adapter.
NVM
Displays whether or not the SCSI adapter has NVRAM for storing
settings. On this server, "Yes" is displayed.
Boot Order
Displays the boot order of SCSI adapters. When the server starts up,
startable SCSI devices connected to SCSI cards (onboard SCSI) are
searched for in ascending numerical order.
SCSI devices start up in order of detection.
LSI Logic Control
RAID Status
Displays whether or not the SCSI adapter can use standard device
drivers.
Displays the status of an array, if configured.
• Optimal
Indicates that the disk array is operating normally.
• Degraded
Indicates that the disk array is operating without redundancy
because of a failure of one hard disk unit.
Replace the failed hard disk unit and restore (rebuild) the system to
the "Optimal" status as soon as possible. For details, refer to
"Onboard SCSI RAID User's Guide".
• Failed
Indicates that the disk array is not operating.
This occurs when two of the hard disk units configuring a disk
array have failed. In this case, the data stored on these hard disk
units are lost.
• Resyncing
Indicates that the disk array is being rebuilt or initialized.
If this occurs, exit the SCSI Setup Utility and start up the OS
immediately. If the OS is not installed, install the OS. When the
OS is started up or OS installation is started, the rebuilding
operation starts (restarts if it is suspended).
8
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
8.3.3 Boot Adapter List Menu
Configures startups from the SCSI adapter.
Select this menu from the header of the [Main] menu.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility
Boot Adapter List
Version
MPTBIOS-IMx.xx.xx
Insert=Add an adapter
Delete=Remove an Adapter
Adapter
1020/1030
PCI
BUS
3
DEV/ Boot Current Next
Func Order Status Boot
28
[0]
On
[ON]
Hit Instert To Select an adapter from this list:
<1020/1030 28>
3
Esc=Abort/Exit
ArrowKeys=Select Item
Home/End=Select Item
-/+=Change[Item]
Enter=Execute<Item>
table: Items on the Boot Adapter List Menu
Setting
Item
Description
Boot Order
0 (Fixed parameter)
Specifies the boot order for SCSI devices.
Use the [-] and [+] keys to change the order.
Next Boot
• ON (at the time of
purchase)
• OFF
Sets whether to enable or disable the SCSI
controller BIOS.
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.3.4 Global Properties Menu
Configures SCSI BOIS operation during POST.
Select this menu from the header of the [Main] menu.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility
Global Properties
Version
MPTBIOS-IMx.xx.xx
Pause When Boot Alert Displayed
Boot Information Display Mode
Negotiate with devices
Video Mode
[Yes]
[Verbose]
[Supported]
[Color]
Support Interrupt
[Hook interrupt, the Default]
<Restore Defaults>
Esc=Abort/Exit
ArrowKeys=Select Item
Home/End=Select Item
-/+=Change[Item]
Enter=Execute<Item>
table: Items on the Global Properties Menu
Item
Setting
Description
Pause When Boot Alert
Displayed
Yes (Fixed parameter)
When a hard disk failure occurs during POST and
the logical drive becomes critical, the startup will
be paused. Use this configuration by setting Yes.
Note:
ꢀ When this configuration is set No, the
following failure may occur. While using the
server without replacing a hard disk and
restarting the system after a hard disk failed,
if the second hard disk failed, the first failed
hard disk may startup depending on the fail
mode. This may result in the system starting
up with old data and losing the new data.
Boot Information Display
Mode
Verbose (Fixed parameter)
Sets the amount of host adapter or SCSI device
information to be displayed in the POST window.
Negotiate with devices
Supported (Fixed
parameter)
Sets the SCSI negotiation method.
8
Video Mode
• Color (at the time of
purchase)
• Monochrome
Sets whether or not to display information on the
SCSI Setup Utility in color or monochrome during
POST.
Support Interrupt
Hook Interrupt, the Default Displays the IRQ mode.
(Fixed parameter)
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
8.3.5 Adapter Properties Menu
Sets detailed configuration information on each SCSI adapter.
From the list area on the [Main] menu, select the SCSI adapter to configure.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility
Adapter Properties
Version
MPTBIOS-IMx.xx.xx
Adapter
1020/1030
PCI
Bus
3
Dev/
Func
28
<Device Properties>
<RAID Properties> <Synchronize Whole Mirror> <Rebuild>
Host SCSI ID
[7]
SCSI Bus Scan Order
Removable Media Support
CHS Mapping
[Low to High (0..Max)]
[None]
[SCSI Plug and Play Mapping]
Spinup Delay (Secs)
Secondary Cluster Server
Termination Control
<Restore Defaults>
[2]
[No]
[Auto]
Esc=Abort/Exit
ArrowKeys=Select Item
Home/End=Select Item
-/+=Change[Item]
Enter=Execute<Item>
table: Items on the Adapter Properties Menu
Setting
Item
Description
Device Properties
Configures devices connected to SCSI adapters. Press the [Enter] key to display
the submenu.
RAID Properties
Synchronize Whole Mirror
Rebuild
Configures or deletes an array.
The server does not support these items. Do not select these item.
Host SCSI ID
7 (Fixed parameter)
Sets the range of host adapter SCSI IDs.
SCSI Bus Scan Order
Low to High (0..Max)
(Fixed parameter)
Sets the order of SCSI devices to be scanned during
POST.
Removable Media Support
CHS Mapping
None (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether or not to support a removable disk unit
(MO disk unit) as a SCSI disk drive in the SCSI
Setup Utility.
SCSI Plug and Play
Mapping (Fixed parameter)
Specifies the CHS information mapping method.
Spinup Delay (Secs)
2 (Fixed parameter)
No (Fixed parameter)
Sets device startup intervals.
Secondary Cluster Server
Sets whether or not to use this server in a cluster
configuration.
Termination Control
Restore Defaults
Auto (Fixed parameter)
Sets the SCSI bus terminal.
The server does not support this.
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.3.6 Device Properties Submenu
Configures devices connected to SCSI adapters.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility
Version
MPTBIOS-IMx.xx.xx
Device Properties
SCSI Device
Restore
Mt/Sec
MB/Sec Data Scan Scan
Dis-
SCSI
LUNs>0
connect TimeOut Tags
Queue
ID
0
Identifer
Defaults
Width ID
-
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
<Defaults>
[160]
[160]
[160]
[160]
[160]
[160]
[160]
[160]
[160]
[160]
[160]
[160]
[160]
[160]
[160]
[160]
320
320
320
320
320
320
320
320
320
320
320
320
320
320
320
320
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[16] [Yes] [Yes]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
< 10>
< 10>
< 10>
< 10>
< 10>
< 10>
< 10>
< 10>
< 10>
< 10>
< 10>
< 10>
< 10>
< 10>
< 10>
< 10>
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
[On]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1020/1030
8
SDR CEM318
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Esc=Abort/Exit
ArrowKeys=Select Item
Home/End=Select Item
-/+=Change[Item]
Enter=Execute<Item>
table: Items on the Device Properties Submenu
Item
Setting
Description
Restore Defaults
MT/Sec
-
The server does not support this.
• 0
• 5
Sets the maximum transfer rate the host adapter
supports.
• 10
• 20
• 40
• 80
• 160 (at the time of
purchase)
MB/Sec
-
Displays the maximum transfer speed the host
adapter supports.
Data Width
Scan ID
16 (Fixed parameter)
Sets the maximum transfer width the host adapter
supports.
• Yes (at the time of
purchase)
• No
Sets whether or not to scan devices.
Scan LUNs>0
Disconnect
Yes (Fixed parameter)
On (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether or not to scan LUNs.
Sets whether or not the host adapter disconnects
SCSI devices from the SCSI bus.
8
SCSI Timeout
Queue Tags
10 (Fixed parameter)
On (Fixed parameter)
Sets the SCSI timeout time (seconds).
Sets whether or not to support tagged command
queues.
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
8.3.7 RAID Properties Submenu
Sets an array configured with the onboard SCSI array controller.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility
Version
MPTBIOS-IMx.xx.xx
RAID Properties
Array:
SCSI ID:
Size(MB):
SCSI Device Identifier
ID
Array
DISK?
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
Hot
Spare
[No]
[-]
[-]
[-]
[-]
[-]
[-]
[-]
[-]
[-]
[-]
[-]
[-]
[-]
[-]
[-]
Status
Predict
Failure
Size
(MB)
0
-
***MB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1020/1030
8
SDR CEM318
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Esc=Abort/Exit
ArrowKeys=Select Item
Home/End=Select Item
-/+=Change[Item]
Enter=Execute<Item>
table: Items on the RAID Properties Submenu
Setting
Item
Contents
Array Disk?
• Yes (array type/Linux array
type)
Sets whether or not the hard disk unit configures a
disk array.
• No (other types than array
type/Linux array type)
Hot Spare
Status
No (Fixed parameter)
-
The server does not support this.
Displays the hard disk status when a disk array is
configured.
• [Primary] or [OK]
Indicates that the hard disk unit is operating
normally.
• Failed
Indicates that the hard disk unit has failed.
• Out of Sync
Indicates that the hard disk unit being rebuilt.
• Missing
Indicates that the hard disk unit is not installed or
recognized.
Size (MB)
-
Indicates the hard disk capacity.
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Creating a Disk Array
Only a RAID1 disk array can be created with the onboard SCSI array controller.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Use two internal hard disk units of the same type and with the same capacity to create a RAID1 disk
array. Do not use internal hard disk units different in type from each other.
Be sure to install RAID Management Tool to configure a disk array. For details, refer to "Onboard SCSI
RAID User's Guide".
When configuring a disk array using an internal hard disk units that have been used in another system
and may contain partition information or other data, connect the hard disk units to another system and
perform low-level formatting before physically connecting them to this server. For details, refer to the
manual supplied with the system to be used.
ꢀ
Upon creation of a disk array, exit the SCSI Setup Utility and start OS installation immediately. As soon
as a disk array is created, array initialization will start. However, if the SCSI Setup Utility is still running,
the initialization will take long time (even for several days).
The onboard SCSI array controller in this server supports background initialization (BGI). Start OS
installation without waiting for the initialization to complete. For array initialization, refer to "Onboard
SCSI RAID User's Guide".
1
Display [RAID Properties] submenu from the [Adapter Properties] menu.
2
3
Select [Array Disk?] for SCSI ID0 and press the [+] or [-] key.
When the following message appears, press the [F3] key.
F3 - Keep Data (Create 2 disk array)
Delete - Erase Disk (Create 2 to 6 disk array)
4
Select [Array Disk?] for SCSI ID1 and press the [+] or [-] key.
ꢀ
If the following message appears, the internal hard disk unit for creating a disk array already
contains data. Check if the data are important. Once a disk array is created, the data on the
internal hard disks will be deleted.
WARNING:Data on drive will be LOST!
Press DELETE if data loss OK or any key to cancel
5
6
Press the [Esc] key.
When [RAID Properties Changed] appears, select [Save changes then exit this
menu] and press the [Enter] key.
8
■ Deleting a Disk Array
1
Select [RAID Properties] submenu from the [Adapter Properties] menu.
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
2
Select [Delete Array] and press the [Enter] key.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility
Version
MPTBIOS-IMx.xx.xx
<Next Array> <Delete Array> <Add/Delete Hot Spare> <Activate Array>
RAID Properties
Array:
SCSI ID:
Size(MB):
SCSI Device Identifier
Array
DISK?
[Yes]
[Yes]
Hot
Status
Predict
Size
(MB)
ID
Spare
[No]
[No]
Failure
Primary
0
1
-
***MB
***MB
Out of Sync
Esc=Abort/Exit
ArrowKeys=Select Item
Home/End=Select Item
-/+=Change[Item]
Enter=Execute<Item>
3
When [RAID Properties Changed] appears, select [Save changes then exit this
menu] and press the [Enter] key.
8.3.8 Formatting hard disks physically
On this server, physical formatting cannot be performed from SCSI Setup Utility menus.
When a hard disk must be formatted physically, perform the following procedure to run the SCSI Low-
Level Format Utility.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Physical formatting deletes all data on the selected hard disk. Make a backup before using this
function.
Physical formatting of a hard disk takes time. Once started, it cannot be aborted. Perform it when you
have enough time.
Do not turn off or reset the server during physical formatting. Otherwise, the hard disk may be
damaged.
ꢀ
ꢀ
The "Server Management Tools" disk supplied with the server is required.
Hard disk units in a disk array configuration cannot be physically formatted. Delete the disk array
beforehand. For the procedure for deleting a disk array, refer to "■ Deleting a Disk Array" (ꢁpg.243).
■ Performing Physical Formatting
1
2
Insert the "Server Management Tools" disk and turn the server on.
When a command prompt is displayed, enter the following command and press
the [Enter] key.
A:\SMTOOL\>ASPIFMT.EXE
The SCSI Low-Level Format Utility starts up.
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3
4
5
Use the [↑] [↓] keys to select the hard disk to format physically. Press the
[Space] key to set it.
Press the [Tab] key to move to the [Format] button. Press the [Space] key.
A confirmation message is displayed.
Read the message, select [Format] again, and press the [Space] key.
Physical formatting starts.
When the physical formatting completes, a completion message appears.
6
7
Check that [Failed Formatting Drive(s)] indicates "none." Select [Exit] and press
the [Space] key.
Select [Exit] again and press the [Space] key.
The physical formatting has completed when a command prompt appears.
The server can be turned off.
8
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration/Utilities
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.1 Daily Maintenance
This section explains how to check the status of the operating server, as well as how
to perform daily maintenance.
9.1.1 Checking the Server Condition
Use the status LED or server monitoring tool to check the server status.
■ Checking Each LED
This server is equipped with LEDs that display various hardware conditions.
Check the server status via each LED after starting the server. For positions and functions of each status
■ Server Monitoring Tool (ServerView)
ServerView is software to monitor that the server hardware is in a normal state to protect important
server resources. When using ServerView, the server hardware is monitored all the time. If an error that
could cause trouble is detected, the administrator is notified in real-time for early detection. This allows
the server administrator to remove a system error early and avoid trouble.
For an overview and installation of ServerView and other high reliability tools, refer to "1.2.2 High
9.1.2 Cleaning
Clean the server and optional devices periodically to prevent failures.
• Before cleaning, turn off the server and unplug the power cables from the
outlets. Also power off peripherals and disconnect them from the server.
(pg.32)).
■ Cleaning the Server
Wipe with a soft, dry cloth. For stains that do not come off with a dry cloth, wipe with a cloth lightly
dampened with a mild detergent. Once the stain has been removed, wipe off any remaining detergent
with a cloth dampened with water. When wiping the server, be sure that no moisture enters the server
machine.
Do not use solvents. Use a mild detergent only. Otherwise, the server may be damaged.
Use a vacuum cleaner periodically to prevent dust buildup in ventilation holes.
ꢁ
In dusty environments, dust piles up on the front and rear panels of the server over short periods.
Install the server in a different location to avoid failures.
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Cleaning the Server Interior
In dusty environments, dust deposits in the server. Dust deposits may cause a server failure, fire, or
electric shock. To keep the PRIMERGY server in good condition, use a vacuum cleaner periodically to
remove dust deposits.
Cleaning components
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
CPUs: Dust deposits must be removed because it will impair the cooling performance.
Fans: Remove dust from and around the fans.
Memory/expansion cards: Remove dust between memory modules and between expansion cards.
Remove dust from the connector before adding a memory module or an expansion card.
Internal hard disk units/5-inch internal options: Remove dust deposits from units and devices. Tape
devices are particularly susceptible to dust and may cause failures. Install them in a clean
environment.
ꢁ
• Do not disassemble the PSU when cleaning the server interior. Doing so may
cause failures or electric shock.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Be careful when removing components such as CPUs, memory modules, or hard disk units. Be sure to
install parts and cables in the original position.
Leaving dust brushed off or blown with air in the server can cause failure. Be sure to take it out of the
server.
■ Cleaning the Keyboard
Wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
9
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
■ Cleaning the Mouse
Wipe the surface with a soft, dry cloth. If the tracking ball does not spin or roll smoothly, remove the ball
and clean it.
● Cleaning Method
1
Remove the cover from under the mouse.
Remove the cover under the mouse by rotating it in the direction of the arrow.
2
Remove the ball and rinse it with water.
Flip the mouse over to remove the ball. Afterwards, wash it with water.
3
Clean the inside of the mouse.
Wipe the inside of the mouse, the roller, and the bottom cover with a damp cloth.
Roller
4
Insert the ball and apply the cover.
After the ball and inside of the mouse are dry, insert the ball and apply the cover.
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Cleaning the Floppy Disk Drive
Prolonged use of the floppy disk drive accumulates dust on the device head (the part which reads/writes
data). A dirty head can impair the ability to read/write data to/from a floppy disk correctly. Clean the
head once every three months.
■ Optional Devices
For cleaning optional devices, refer to the manual of each device.
9
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.2 Troubleshooting
This section explains the resolutions when the server is not running properly or when
error messages are displayed.
For each situation, refer to the following. If the problem is not resolved after performing the following
troubleshooting, contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
When contacting an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide", refer to "9.9.2
Contacting Maintenance Support" (ꢀpg.286) and collect the required information.
•
•
•
Hardware problems.
Error messages.
Software problems.
9.2.1 Hardware Troubleshooting
This section explains hardware related troubleshooting. If the server does not operate properly or if a
failure is suspected, check the following.
For optional devices, refer to the manual included with the optional device.
■ Server
● The server does not power on, or the power LED on the front of the server
does not light up.
Check to see whether the power cable is properly connected to the outlet.
For instructions on connecting the power cable, refer to "Start Guide".
● The access LED does not light up.
The server may be damaged. Contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
Before contacting an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide", refer to "9.9.2
Contacting Maintenance Support" (ꢀpg.286).
● An error message is displayed.
● When an expansion card is added, other expansion cards or onboard
devices are not recognized.
Reinstall the drivers for the expansion cards or onboard devices that are not recognized.
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
● A temperature warning is output to the hardware event log and OS event log,
or ServerView issues a notification of a temperature warning such as by a
popup message.
The above log is output or the above notification is issued by ServerView when the ambient temperature
is within 30 to 35 °C, which is near the upper limit of the temperature boundaries (10 to 35 °C). This is
to notify the administrator before the ambient temperature actually exceeds the range of the temperature
boundaries.
Although continued use within the temperature boundaries poses no problems within itself, reconsider
the surrounding environment conditions if this log is output or if ServerView issues this notification.
■ Display
● The display does not power on.
Check to see whether the power cable of the display is properly connected to the outlet. For details, refer
to "Start Guide" or the manual of the display.
● Nothing is displayed on the screen.
•
Check to see whether the display cable is connected properly.
If it is not connected, turn the server off and then connect the cable.
For the connection location, refer to "Start Guide".
•
Check that the brightness volume and contrast volume of the display are adjusted correctly. If they
need to be adjusted, perform the necessary adjustments.
For details, refer to the manual of the display.
•
•
There may be an error in the system area of the memory. Contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
The server or an optional device may have a problem.
Contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
● Typing the keyboard does not display any characters, or the mouse cursor
does not move.
Check to see whether the keyboard and mouse are connected properly. If they are not connected, turn the
server off and then connect the cables to the server. For details, refer to "Start Guide".
● The screen shakes.
If a device that produces a strong magnetic field such as a television or speaker is near the display, place
them further away from the display.
The display may also shake if a nearby cell-phone receives a call. Do not use a cell-phone near the
display.
9
● The screen display is distorted.
The screen display may be distorted during 3D program execution in Windows or the 3D program may
terminate abnormally. If this occurs, set Color quality in screen properties to anything other than True
Color (32 bits).
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
■ Floppy Disk Drive
● Cannot read or write to the floppy disk.
The head may be dirty. Clean the drive using a cleaning disk.
● Cannot write to the floppy disk.
The write protection of the floppy disk may be applied. Flip the switch on the disk to allow writing.
■ CD-ROM Drive Unit
● Cannot read data.
•
•
•
Check to see whether the CD-ROM is inserted properly.
If it is not inserted, correctly insert the CD-ROM so that the label is facing up.
Check to see whether the CD-ROM is not dirty.
If it is dirty, wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Check to see whether the CD-ROM is not scratched or bent.
If scratched or damaged, replace the CD-ROM.
● The unit does not operate properly.
•
The CD-ROM drive unit may not be recognized at the next startup after installation of fiber channel
Check to see whether the internal cable is connected properly.
•
If it is not connected, correctly connect the internal cable. For the connection location, refer to "7.10
Connection of Optional Devices" (ꢀpg.201).
■ SCSI Device (Internal/External)
● The unit does not operate properly.
•
Check to see whether the internal cable is connected properly.
If it is not connected, correctly connect the internal cable.
Check to see whether the jumper pins are set properly.
If they are not set, correctly set the jumper pins. For settings, refer to "8.1 Jumper Pin Settings"
(ꢀpg.206).
•
•
Check to see whether the SCSI IDs and terminator are set properly.
If they are not set, correctly set the SCSI ID and terminator.
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.2.2 Error Messages
This section explains the error messages on this server.
■ POST Error Messages
When an error occurs during Power On Self Test (POST: device check performed during the server
startup process), take the corresponding corrective actions described in the table below.
table: List of POST Error Messages
Message
Failure Fixed Disk
Description
Check the [Primary Master] settings on the "8.2.2 Main Menu"
(ꢀpg.211) of the BIOS Setup Utility. If the message still appears, the
baseboard must be replaced. Contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
Stuck Key
Remove objects, if any, that are pressing against any keys on the
keyboard. Check to see whether the keyboard is connected properly. If
the message still appears even though the server has been restarted,
replace the keyboard. If the message still appears, the baseboard must be
replaced. Contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the
"Start Guide".
Keyboard error
Remove objects, if any, that are pressing against any keys on the
keyboard. Check to see whether the keyboard is connected properly. If
the message still appears, replace the keyboard. If the message still
appears, the baseboard must be replaced. Contact an office listed in the
"Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
Keyboard controller error
Turn the server off and check that the memory modules are installed
properly. If the message appears after the server is turned on again,
check the system event log and replace the memory modules. If the
message still appears, the baseboard must be replaced. Contact an office
listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
System RAM Failed at offset:
nnnnnnnnh
Shadow Ram Failed at offset:
nnnnnnnnh
Extended RAM Failed at address line:
nnnnh
Memory type mixing detected.
The installation configuration of the memory is wrong. Verify that the
same type of memory is installed to the slots of the same bank. If the
message still appears, the baseboard must be replaced. Contact an office
listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
Memory decreased in Size
The memory is abnormal. Refer to the system event log and replace the
abnormal DIMM. If the message still appears, the baseboard must be
replaced. Contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the
"Start Guide".
Memory Redundancy Feature could
not configure the Mirror DIMMs
This message appears when the user attempts to enable the memory
mirroring function while the capacity differs between the paired memory
modules or memory modules are not installed in a pair. Check the
capacity of all installed memory modules. If the message still appears,
the baseboard must be replaced. Contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
9
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
table: List of POST Error Messages
Description
Message
Memory Redundancy Feature could
not configure the Spare DIMMs
This message appears when the user attempts to enable the hot spare
memory function while the capacity differs between the paired memory
modules or memory modules are not installed in a pair. Check the
capacity of all installed memory modules. If the message still appears,
the baseboard must be replaced. Contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
Non Fujitsu Siemens Memory Module
detected - Warranty restricted!
The memory is abnormal. Check to see that the jumper pin settings or
BIOS Setup Utility settings are correct. If the message still appears, the
baseboard must be replaced. Contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
Application CPU timeout error
Power off the server and turn it back on. If the message still appears,
check the error log and replace the CPU. If the message still appears, the
baseboard must be replaced. Contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
System battery is dead - Replace and
run SETUP
The battery is abnormal. Contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
Correct the changed settings with the BIOS Setup Utility or restore the
settings at the time of purchase. If the message still appears, the
baseboard must be replaced. Contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
System CMOS checksum bad -
Default configuration used
System timer error
Power off the server and turn it back on. If the message still appears, the
baseboard must be replaced. Contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
of the BIOS Setup Utility. If the message still appears, the baseboard
must be replaced. Contact an office listed in the "Contact Information"
of the "Start Guide".
Real time clock error
Check date and time settings
CPU had been changed - Run SETUP
Check that the correct CPUs are installed. If the same message appears
again, change [Reset Configuration Data] on the "8.2.5 Advanced
Menu" (ꢀpg.215) to [Yes] in the BIOS Setup Utility. If the message still
appears, contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the
"Start Guide".
Check that the correct CPUs are installed. If so, update the BIOS. If the
same message appears again, change [Reset Configuration Data] on the
the message still appears, contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
CPU mismatch detected
Baseboard Management Controller
Error
Turn the server off and unplug the power cables from the server. Turn
the server back on. If the message still appears, the baseboard must be
replaced. Contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the
"Start Guide".
Setup Utility. Check to see whether the floppy disk drive cable is
connected properly. If the message still appears, contact an office listed
in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
Diskette drive A error
Incorrect Drive A type - run SETUP
CPU runtime error(IERR#) detected
Check the system event logs. If the message still appears, contact an
office listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
table: List of POST Error Messages
Description
Message
Memory configuration has changed -
Run SETUP
If this error occurs after addition of memory modules, change [Reset
in the BIOS Setup Utility. If the message still appears, contact an office
listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
No usable system memory.
The memory is abnormal. Refer to the system event log and replace the
abnormal DIMM. If the message still appears, the baseboard must be
replaced. Contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the
"Start Guide".
Memory module failed! This module
Turn the server off and check that the memory modules are installed
is no longer available for the operating properly. If the message appears after the server is turned on again,
system.
check the system event log and replace the memory modules. If the
message still appears, the baseboard must be replaced. Contact an office
listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
No usable CPU
The CPU is abnormal. Contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
Check that the correct CPUs are installed. If so, update the BIOS. If the
same message appears again, change [Reset Configuration Data] on the
the message still appears, contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
Patch for installed CPU not loaded.
Please run the bios flash update
diskette.
CPU disable! CPU is no longer
The CPU is abnormal. Contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
available for the operating system.
Invalid System Configuration Data
Change [Reset Configuration Data] on "8.2.5 Advanced Menu"
appears, contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the
"Start Guide".
Resource Conflict
System resources (IRQs, DMA channels, or I/O port addresses) conflict.
Start up the BIOS Setup Utility again and check the system resource
settings.
If the message still appears, contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
IRQ not configured
Check the settings on the BIOS Setup Utility. If the message still
appears, replace the expansion card. If the message still appears, contact
an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
Expansion ROM not initialized
Allocation error static node #
On the screen, check the expansion card or device being initialized.
Replace the card. If the message still appears, contact an office listed in
the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
An onboard device or expansion card is abnormal. Replace the device or
expansion card. If the message still appears, contact an office listed in
the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
Baseboard Management Controller
has detected an error
Check the system event log and replace the abnormal option.
A temperature has exceeded the
warning threshold
Temperature is abnormal.
Check and improve the environment. If the message still appears,
contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
9
A temperature has exceeded the
critical threshold
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
table: List of POST Error Messages
Description
Message
CPU fan speed has exceeded the
warning threshold
A CPU fan is abnormal.
Check for objects hindering CPU fan rotation. If the message still
appears, contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the
"Start Guide".
CPU fan speed has exceeded the
critical threshold
System fan speed has exceeded the
warning threshold
A system fan is abnormal.
Check for objects hindering system fan rotation. If the message still
appears, contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the
"Start Guide".
System fan speed has exceeded the
critical threshold
Power supply fan speed has exceeded
the warning threshold
A power supply unit fan is abnormal.
Check for objects hindering power supply unit fan rotation. If the
message still appears, contact an office listed in the "Contact
Information" of the "Start Guide".
Power supply fan speed has exceeded
the critical threshold
System board voltage has exceeded
the critical threshold
Turn the server off and unplug the power cables from the server. Turn
the server back on. If the message still appears, the baseboard must be
replaced. Contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the
"Start Guide".
System Event Log utilization has
exceeded the warning threshold.
Please save the System Event Log to a
different media and clear it
afterwards.
There is no space for system event logs.
Store or delete logs as necessary.
Warning!: The array is degraded.
Press [Ctrl] [A] to continue after insert
Floppy Disk.Warning!: The array is
degraded. Press [Ctrl] [A] to continue
after insert Floppy Disk.
hard disk failure is detected.
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Server Management Tools Error Messages
Error messages may appear while executing Server Management Tools. Perform the corresponding
resolution listed in the table. If messages other than the following are displayed, contact an office listed
in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
table: List of Server Management Tools Error Messages
Message
Description
Write protect error writing drive A.
Abort, Retry, Fail?
The inserted floppy disk is write-protected. Disable the
write-protect, and then press the [R] key.
Not ready writing drive A.
Abort, Retry, Fail?
The floppy disk is not inserted into the floppy disk
drive. Insert the proper floppy disk ("Server
Management Tools" disk), and then press the [R] key.
ERROR:Fail to create data file.
The following are possible causes. Check the floppy
disk status again.
ERROR:Fail to write 1st CMOS data into data file. nn
ERROR:Fail to write 2nd CMOS data into data file. nn
ERROR:Fail to write ESCD data into the data file. nn
• The floppy disk is not inserted into the floppy disk
drive. Insert the proper floppy disk, and then retry.
• The floppy disk is write-protected. Disable the
write-protect and retry.
ERROR:Fail to write SEEPROM data into the data file.
nn
• The floppy disk contains abnormal contents. Create
the "Server Management Tools" disk again. If this
occurred while recovering BIOS information,
configure the information using the BIOS Setup
Utility. Then store the BIOS information.
ERROR:Fail to open data file.
The file for recovering the BIOS information does not
exist on this floppy disk. Insert the floppy disk on
which the BIOS information was stored, and then retry.
ERROR:Fail to write 1st CMOS data into system. nn
The following are possible causes. Check the floppy
disk status again.
ERROR:Fail to write 2nd CMOS data into system file.
nn
• The floppy disk is not inserted into the floppy disk
drive. Insert the proper floppy disk, and then retry.
• A different model or an unsupported version of
BIOS information. Insert the proper floppy disk, and
then retry.
ERROR:Fail to write ESCD data into system file. nn
ERROR:Fail to write SEEPROM data into system. nn
• The floppy disk contains abnormal contents. Create
the "Server Management Tools" disk again. If this
occurred while recovering BIOS information,
configure the information using the BIOS Setup
Utility. Then store the BIOS information.
Other messages
Contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of
the "Start Guide".
9
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.2.3 Software Troubleshooting
This section explains software related troubleshooting. For troubles during OS installation or system
operation, refer to the following contents.
■ Trouble at a ServerStart Startup
● After a boot from the ServerStart CD-ROM, nothing is displayed on the
screen.
This problem may occur if the hard disk drive still contains previous information. In that case, this
problem will occur when the Windows Server 2003 Installation CD-ROM is inserted.
To eliminate this problem, physically format the hard disk drive to delete the previous information and
start up ServerStart. For physical formatting, refer to "8.3.8 Formatting hard disks physically"
(ꢀpg.244).
■ Trouble during OS Installation
● Automatic logon is not performed during Windows 2000 setup.
During OS installation, ServerStart installs applications and hardware utilities supplied with the OS.
Installation and subsequent restart and logon are performed automatically as necessary. In rare cases,
however, automatic logon is not performed and the logon window appears. In this widow, use the user
name and password you have set before starting installation. After logon, the setup procedures are
continued.
● Automatic installation stopped at an entry screen during Active Directory
configuration.
If automatic installation has stopped during Active Directory configuration, check the error message
first. Automatic installation can stop when the password is required, such as when registration in DNS
fails. Check the environment and continue the installation manually. If the problem is not solved, click
[Cancel] and after the OS installation, manually configure Active Directory.
If you have continued the Active Directory installation wizard manually, the following message appears
when the installation wizard closes.
"You must restart Windows to make the settings in the Active Directory
installation wizard effective."
When this message appears, click [Restart] to continue the installation.
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Error Window Appears after Installation or Uninstallation of
ServerView or RAID Management Tool (Global Array Manager) on
Windows Server 2003
Systems with Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 may display the following popup message at the
next startup after installation or uninstallation of ServerView or RAID Management Tool. This is not a
problem. Click [Close message] to close the message.
Windows has terminated the following program to prevent damage to your
computer.
Name: SNMP Service
■ Error Messages during Installation
The following error messages may appear during installation using ServerStart. Check the corrective
action against the relevant error.
● "WzDiskAdmin: System Error! ---------------, Last Error: The device is not
ready." appears.
External devices (e.g., hard disk cabinet) may be connected. Disconnect the optional SCSI devices and
perform installation again. Connect the optional devices after the installation completes.
● "WzDiskAdmin: Partition detected! Please delete all partition before starting
Configuration" appears.
Run the guide or preconfiguration mode again. Check [Delete all partitions on the displayed disk] in the
disk wizard.
● "WzRaid: RAID arrays detected! Please delete all RAID arrays before starting
Configuration" appears.
Use the ServerStart floppy disk you have created. Check [Delete existing RAID array] or select [Use
existing array] in the RAID wizard.
● "Operating System not found" appears when the system restarts after file
copy from the CD-ROM.
The possible causes are as follows:
•
•
The RAID card comes earlier than the onboard SCSI array card in order of device startup.
The Active flag is specified.
● "Missing Operating System" appears during installation.
The installation partition size may be too large. Specify the installation partition size correctly.
For details on the installation partition size, refer to "2.3.1 Installation Partition Size" (ꢀpg.45).
9
● "Error 1920. Service (PXE Services) failed to start" appears during
preconfigured installation.
The system installed with the preconfigured settings (PXE server) may not be connected to the network.
Check the LAN cable connection and click [Rerun].
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
■ Error Window Appears after LAN Driver Installation (on Windows
Server 2003)
The following window may appear when the installation of the LAN driver to the [Ethernet controller]
under [Other devices] starts.
This is because the LAN driver for the network adapter recognized immediately after the OS installation
is not updated.
Clicking [Finish] in this window displays the [Help and Support Center] window. Click [X] to close this
window.
The "!" mark is displayed at the LAN device name in Device Manager. Device names are displayed
properly when all LAN drivers are installed and the system is restarted.
For details on LAN driver installation, refer to "4.3.1 Installing the LAN Driver (Windows Server
2003)" (ꢀpg.121).
■ Application Error Occurs in the OS Installation Wizard in ServerStart
Preconfiguration Mode
Executing the preconfiguration mode on a client computer installed with Microsoft Visual Studio 6.0
Service Pack 5 will cause an application error.
Install ServerStart in a client computer in a different environment or use the guided mode on this server.
This problem does not occur in Windows 2000 Server since it is corrected by Windows 2000 Service
Pack 4.
■ LAN Operation Fails or Error Message Appears during LAN Driver
Installation
A conflict may have occurred between system resources including the LAN and other expansion cards.
Delete all LAN drivers and check that conflicts between system resources do not exist. Then, restart the
system and install the LAN drivers. For the LAN driver installation procedure, refer to "4.3 Installing
the LAN Driver" (ꢀpg.121).
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Event Log Errors after Installation
After Windows installation, the following events may be displayed in Event Viewer. Check and perform
the corrective action against the relevant event.
table: Error Events at Installation
ID
Description
Cause and corrective action
9
The device nnnn, did not respond
during the timeout time.
This message may appear when an expansion card such as a
RAID card or a SCSI card is installed. However, this is not a
problem.
15
62
The device, nnnn, is not ready for
access yet.
Cause:
An NTP was selected as a component.
Corrective action:
This computer is a domain PDC at the
root of forest. Use the net command
"net time /setsntp:<server name>" to
configure it for synchronization from
an external time source.
ServerStart cannot configure the NTP server automatically due
to the absence of items for specifying it. After OS installation,
perform the following procedure to specify the time server.
1. Start SNTP server operation on another machine.
Assume that the SNTP server address is
<172.22.78.246>.
2. Enter the following at a command prompt.
net time /setsntp:172.22.78.246
w32tm -s 172.22.78.246
1000
Cause:
The user or computer name cannot be
identified. The return value is "1722".
The primary DNS server address may be invalid or the server
cannot be connected.
Corrective action:
Perform the following procedures to correct the DNS address
in Internet protocol (TCP/IP) properties.
1. Right-click [My Network] and select [Properties].
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click
[Properties].
3. Click [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] and click
[Properties].
4. Enter the correct DNS address in the [Primary DNS
server] box.
■ Cannot Collect the Memory Dump
If the memory dump file cannot be created, perform the following procedures.
● Correct the settings
If the memory dump cannot be collected, check the settings of the paging file and memory dump file.
● Collect memory dump to other than the system drive
If the memory dump was set to be collected to the system drive (C:\), change the settings so that the
memory dump can be saved to a drive other than the system drive.
If only the system drive exists, or if there is no free space in any of the drives, perform one of the
following.
9
•
•
Adding a hard disk
Replacing with a larger hard disk
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
● Reduce the installed memory to collect the memory dump
To obtain memory dump regardless of the installed memory size, reduce the installed memory to an
obtainable size.
Check the memory dump settings when changing the installed memory size.
● Change the write type of the debugging information
(Windows Server 2003/Windows 2000 Server)
If the memory dump cannot be collected, select a write type of debugging information within the range
of free space of the volume size.
If the above does not provide a solution, try increasing the size of the hard disk or adding an additional
hard disk.
■ When the Server is Turned on, a Message is Recorded in the
ServerView Event Log.
In rare cases, the following message may be recorded in the ServerView event log when the server
installed with a remote service board is turned on.
PCI BIST timeout, rebooting Server
The server operates normally if this message is recorded.
However, if messages are recorded continuously, contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of
the "Start Guide".
■ Restore the System
In the unfortunate event where the system file, system configuration, or environment changes during
startup are corrupted, use the repair information stored on the recovery disk created at the installation to
restore the system.
For restoration procedures, refer to the following.
•
•
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Fails in Remote Installation
If remote installation fails, check the following.
● Checking Services
Check that the DHCP, PXE Service, and TFTP Service are running.
● Setting TFTP
To access TFTP Service, add a Guest account to the TFTP folder and set the full control rights.
● Checking Network Function Settings
The server must support the network function (PXE).
For the setting procedure, refer to "Performing Remote Installation" in "2.1.2 Hardware Settings"
(ꢀpg.42).
● Checking the MAC Address
Check that the current MAC address is the correct MAC address of the server.
For the MAC address checking procedure, refer to "Performing Remote Installation" in "2.1.2 Hardware
Settings" (ꢀpg.42).
● Checking LAN Cable Connection
Check that the LAN cable is connected to the LAN card corresponding to the specified MAC address
and that the LAN card is connected to the network.
■ SNMP Service Startup Fails
Regardless of whether the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is installed, if the SNMP
service is not started, perform the following procedure to start the SNMP service.
● For Windows Server 2003
1
2
3
4
Click [Start] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer Management].
Select [Services] from [Services and Applications].
From the details, select [SNMP Service].
Select [Start] from the [Action] menu.
9
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
● For Windows 2000 Server
1
Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop and click [Manage] from the
displayed menu.
2
3
4
Select [Services] from the [Services and Applications] menu.
From the details, select [SNMP Service].
Select [Start] from the [Action] menu.
ꢁ
To have the service automatically started each time the OS starts, double-click [SNMP Service] from
the details, and select [Automatic] for the [Startup type] setting on the displayed window.
■ Time Display in Linux OS Environment
● Difference in Time between the OS and the Hardware Clock
During OS operation in a Linux environment, the software clock on the OS, rather than the hardware
clock in the server, is used to display the time.
This may cause a difference in time between the OS and the hardware clock.
When you want to see the accurate time on the OS, it is recommended to use the NTP service to
periodically correct the time displayed on the OS.
● Changing the Time Settings for the OS and Hardware Clock
In a Linux environment, the time displayed on the OS (the software clock value on the OS) is written to
the hardware clock in the server when the OS is shut down.
•
Procedure for prohibiting the time on the OS from being written to the hardware clock
When you do not want the time on the OS to be written to the hardware clock at an OS shutdown,
comment the following line out in /etc/rc0.d/S01halt.
runcmd $"Syncing hardware clock to system time" /sbin/hwclock $CLOCKFLAGS
↓
#runcmd $"Syncing hardware clock to system time" /sbin/hwclock $CLOCKFLAGS
Procedure for reflecting the hardware clock value to the time on the OS
To reflect the hardware clock value to the software clock value on the OS, run the following
command.
•
>hwclock --hctosys
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.3 System Event Log
To operate system event log, use Server Management Tools.
9.3.1 How to Use Server Management Tools
This section explains how to use Server Management Tools.
Server Management Tools can operate event logs stored in the Baseboard Management Controller
(BMC: a micro-controller on the baseboard that manages temperature and voltage sensors).
Server Management Tools has the following functions.
•
•
•
Viewing the System Event Log
Saving the system event log
Deleting the system event log
When an error log occurs, save the log using Server Management Tools and contact your sales
representative or an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
ꢀ
ꢀ
The Server Management Tools disk supplied with this server is exclusively for this server. Do not use
those tools on other systems. If it is used, the system can be damaged.
Run Server Management Tools when the server is operating. Refer to "■ Starting Server
Management Tools" (ꢁpg.267). Do not run this tool on the server started from the hard disk drive or
other floppy disks. Otherwise, the system may be corrupted.
ꢀ
Do not eject the floppy disk when the floppy disk access LED is on. Doing so may destroy the data on
the floppy disk.
■ Starting Server Management Tools
ꢀ
Before starting the system from the "Server Management Tools" disk, check to see that the "OS Boot
Monitoring" function of ServerView is disabled (default setting).
If the system is started with this function enabled, the server may automatically turn off or restart
improperly.
If the "OS Boot Monitoring" function is needed, it should be reset to enabled before resuming normal
server operation. For details of ServerView, refer to "ServerView User's Guide".
9
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
1
2
Insert the "Server Management Tools" disk supplied with this server into the
floppy disk drive.
The system will boot from the floppy disk and the DOS prompt is displayed.
Enter the following command and press the [Enter] key.
A:\SMTOOL\>IPMIVIEW.EXE
The menu window of Server Management Tools appears.
FUJITSU
SIEMENS
IPMI-Tool - Vx.xx
COMPUTERS
General Information
Temperature Information
Fan Information
Voltage Information
System Event Log (SEL)
FRU Information (ID Proms)
User Management
LAN Configuration
Server Management Control Settings
<
> Select
<ENTER> Start
<ESC> Exit
ꢀ
Only the following functions are supported by Server Management Tools.
• System Event Log (SEL)
• User Management
• LAN Configuration
■ Exiting Server Management Tools
1
Press the [Esc] key once in the menu window of Server Management Tools.
The power can be turned off when the DOS prompt is displayed.
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.3.2 Viewing the System Event Log
Viewing the system event log is performed from System Event Log (SEL) of Server Management Tools.
1
2
Start Server Management Tools.
The menu window of Server Management Tools appears.
Use the [↑] and [↓] keys to select [System Event Log (SEL)], and press the
[Enter] key.
The [SYSTEM EVENT LOG (SEL)] window appears.
FUJITSU
SIEMENS
SYSTEM EVENT LOG (SEL)
COMPUTERS
004 MMM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS [*****] XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
003 MMM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS [*****] XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
002 MMM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS [*****] XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
001 MMM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS [*****] XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
000 MMM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS [*****] XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
< ++,PgUp/Dn,(Ctrl-)Home/End> Move <F2> SaveToFile <F3> Clear <ESC> Exit
3
4
Use the following key operations to scroll the window and check the contents.
[↑], [↓], [←], [→], [Page Up], [Page Down], [Ctrl] + [Home], [Ctrl] + [End]
To exit the system event log, press the [Esc] key.
9
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.3.3 Saving/Deleting the System Event Log
When the system event log is full, the oldest log is overwritten with the newest log. Periodically check
the system event log and save/delete as necessary.
■ Saving the System Event Log
1
Start Server Management Tools.
The menu window of Server Management Tools appears.
2
Use the [↑] and [↓] keys to select [System Event Log (SEL)], and press the
[Enter] key.
The [SYSTEM EVENT LOG (SEL)] window appears.
3
4
Press the [F2] key.
Enter the name of the file to save the system event log to, and press the [Enter]
key.
The system event log is saved to the floppy disk under the specified file name.
■ Deleting the System Event Log
1
Start Server Management Tools.
The menu window of Server Management Tools appears.
2
Use the [↑] and [↓] keys to select [System Event Log (SEL)], and press the
[Enter] key.
The [SYSTEM EVENT LOG (SEL)] window appears.
3
4
Press the [F3] key.
A confirm delete window appears.
Press the [Enter] key.
This deletes the system event log.
ꢀ
Selecting [System Event Log (SEL)] right after deleting the system event log will result in an error.
Allow approximately 10 seconds to select it normally.
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.4 Security
Security features are provided in order to protect the server hardware and software
from theft. Additional security functions, which prevent unauthorized use, provided by
the BIOS Setup Utility are also available to help maintain a highly reliable data
security system.
9.4.1 Hardware Security
This section explains the hardware security features.
Lock the rack door to protect the hardware in the rack from theft or tampering.
To close the rack door, shut the door and return the rack handle, and turn the rack key.
Rack handle
Rack key
Key hole
ꢀ
Do not lose the rack key. If the key is lost, contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the
"Start Guide".
ꢀ
ꢀ
The above explanation is based on the 40U standard rack. For details on other rack systems, refer to
their respective manuals.
9
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.4.2 Security against Unauthorized Use
A password can be set to prevent unauthorized use of the server.
When a password is set, the server is accessible only to the users who know the password.
The password is set in the BIOS Setup Utility. For details on the BIOS Setup Utility, refer to "8.2.10
Security Menu" (ꢁpg.222).
■ Password Types
The following two types of password can be set in this server.
The password types define the privileges of server operations.
● Setup Password (administrator password)
This is the password that allows specific persons to access the BIOS setup. Unless the set password is
entered, the BIOS Setup Utility and the OS cannot be started up.
● System Password (user password)
This is the password that allows specific persons to use the server. Unless the set password is entered,
part of the BIOS Setup Utility and the OS cannot be started up.
■ Setting a Password
1
2
3
Start the BIOS Setup Utility.
Use the [←] [→] keys to select [Security] from the [Main] menu.
The [Security] menu appears.
Use the [↑] [↓] keys to move the cursor to [Set System Password] or [Set Setup
Password], and press the [Enter] key.
The password entry window appears.
Set Setup(System) Password
Enter New Password [
Confirm New Password [
]
]
4
5
Enter the password in the [Enter New Password] field.
Alphanumeric characters can be used. Blocks are displayed instead of the letters entered. To
cancel the password setting, press the [Esc] key.
In the [Confirm New Password] field, enter the password you have entered in
Step 4 and press the [Enter] key.
[System Password] or [Setup Password] on the [Security] menu shows [Installed].
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
ꢀ
ꢀ
When only the user or administrator password is set, the same setting items are accessible to both
users and administrators.
When both passwords are set, users can set dates and user passwords only.
■ Changing/Deleting a Password
Set Setup(System) Password
Enter Current Password [
Enter New Password [
Confirm New Password [
]
]
]
1
2
3
Enter the current password in the [Enter Current Password] field in the
password entry window.
Enter a new password in the [Enter New Password] field.
To delete the password, enter nothing and perform Step 4.
In the [Confirm New Password] field, enter the password you have entered in
Step 2.
To delete the password, enter nothing and perform Step 4.
4
Press the [Enter] key.
When you delete the password, [System Password] or [Setup Password] on the [Security] menu
shows [Not installed].
ꢀ
The system shuts down after three invalid password entries. If this happens, power off the server, turn
it back on, and then enter the correct password.
ꢀ
If you forget your password and cannot start the server, change the jumper pin setting on the
baseboard to clear the CMOS storing the password. Change the jumper pin setting back, and return
the BIOS Setup Utility to the original setting. Then, set the password using this utility.
9
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.4.3 Security When Disposing the Server
■ Notes regarding the Deletion of Data from the Hard Disk When
Disposing or Transferring the Server
When disposing or transferring a server that has been used, the data in the hard disk may be read and
used unscrupulously. To prevent confidential or important data from leaking out, the data on the hard
disk must be wiped before disposing of or transferring the server.
However, wiping the hard disk is not an easy task. Simply initializing (formatting) the hard disk or
deleting the files may give the pretense that the data no longer exists, but in reality the data is simply no
longer accessible to the OS, and it is still accessible to malicious individuals that can restore the data.
Therefore, if confidential or important data is saved to the hard disk, in addition to the operations
mentioned above, it is recommended to use third-party tools or services to wipe the data completely
from the disk to prevent its restoration.
When disposing of or transferring the server, it is the customers responsibility to wipe data contained in
the hard disk in order to prevent such important data from leaking.
Also, if software license agreements prohibit unauthorized distribution of software (OS or application
software), transferring the server without removing the software may violate the license agreements.
These issues must be taken into consideration.
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.5 Backup
This server utilizes high reliability components and hard disks, however, as a
precautionary measure, it is recommended that periodic backups be taken of the
data.
9.5.1 Importance of Backups
If the data on the server is backed up, it can be restored from the backup data in the event of data
corruption in hard disk units due to hardware failures or operational errors. If backups are not made,
restoration is impossible and your important data will be lost permanently. For anxiety-free system
operation, be sure to perform periodic backups of the system.
9.5.2 Backup Devices, Software and Their Operations
A backup of data stored on the server is required for data restoration in the event of server trouble
resulting in a system failure or accidental data loss due to operational errors. If the data on the server is
backed up, it can be restored from the backup in the event of hardware failures or data corruption in hard
disks due to operational errors. If backups are not made, restoration is impossible and data will be
permanently lost. To prepare for unexpected problems, be sure to perform periodic backups of the
system.
•
•
Backup device (e.g., DDS4 drive)
Backup software
(Standard backup software supplied with the OS, e.g., ARCserve, Changer Option)
Backup operations (schedules)
•
Use our genuine backup devices and software. Observe the backup medium (tape) storage conditions.
9
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
■ Notes on Operating Backups
Notes on operating backups are as follows.
For details, refer to the device manuals.
● Head Cleaning
Airborne dust and dust from the magnetic media can collect on the head of the magnetic tape device. To
remove this dust, head cleaning must be implemented. Implement head cleaning when the device
displays a cleaning request. Particularly DDS devices require periodic head cleaning, otherwise dust can
cling to the magnetic head, creating a situation that cannot be cleaned with standard head cleaning
methods, and eventually render the device useless.
Also note that the cleaning media has a limit to how many times it can be used. Manage its lifespan.
Using cleaning media that exceeded its lifespan will have no cleaning effect. Note these points
especially when performing automatic backups with library devices.
● Managing Media Lifespans
Media is a consumable product that must be replaced regularly.
Continued use of media exceeding its lifespan can have negative effects on the device (e.g. increase the
speed of dust accumulation).
The lifespan of media varies depending on the environment and operation condition of the device, the
type of backup software used, and other operation conditions, however, it is recommended that they be
replaced sooner than later.
To manage the lifespan, write the use start date on the media.
● Rotating Media
Rotate between several media for backups. When using a single media cartridge repeatedly, backup data
can be temporarily lost in the event the backup fails. Or if the hard disk were to fail during a backup, the
data will become unrecoverable.
● Avoid Leaving Media in Devices
Because the magnetic recording surface of the device is exposed, media can easily affected by airborne
dust when left inserted for a long period of time. Insert the media before using it, and remove the media
after use, and restore it in its case.
Also note that some tape devices write management information to the tape when ejecting the media. If
the power were to go out when the media is still in the device, this writing process will not be performed
and the media may become corrupted.
To avoid this, remove the media from the device when turning off the server/device.
● Verifying Data after a Backup
Some backup software products provide data verification functions after a backup is completed. Such
functions will read and verify the data written to the media after a backup is completed. This will
increase the usage of the media, thus reducing the number of times it can be used for backups.
Depending on the hardware being used, some devices perform "read after write" operations on data; note
the points of this section as necessary.
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
● Ejecting Media after a Backup
Some backup software products provide functions for ejecting media after a backup is completed. Such
functions will rewind the tape after a backup is completed and then eject the media from the drive.
Be sure to execute this function for autoloader/library devices. Depending on the structure of some
servers, this function may cause the media to eject from an internal device of the server and hit the
chassis door. If this is the case, open the door when ejecting, or do not eject the media.
● Media Label Types and Positions
When writing information such as the name on media, use the label that came with the media.
The area in which a label can be posted on the media of each device varies.
Failing to post labels in the designated area can damage the device.
● Data Storage
When storing data for long periods of time, store the media in a location least affected by temperature,
humidity, and magnetic fields.
9
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.6 Restoring the System
In the unfortunate event where the system file, system configuration, or environment
changes during startup are corrupted, use the repair information stored on the
recovery disk created at the installation to restore the system.
ꢀ
Create a recovery disk when you have installed an OS or changed the system configuration. Refer to
9.6.1 For Windows Server 2003
● Items Required
•
•
•
•
Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM
Automated System Recovery (ASR) floppy disk (created beforehand)
Backup media (created beforehand)
Driver disk (for the onboard SCSI array controller)
For drivers to be used and how to create driver disks, refer to "4.1 Creating Driver Disks" (ꢁpg.110).
Windows Server 2003 First Step Guide
•
1
Follow "Windows Server 2003 First Step Guide" to start Windows Server 2003
setup.
2
3
When a message prompting you to press the [F6] key appears immediately
after the start of setup, press the [F6] key.
When a message prompting you to press the [F2] key appears, press the [F2]
key.
A message prompting you to insert the ASR floppy disk appears.
4
5
6
Insert the ASR floppy disk and follow the window instructions.
The system restarts and a message appears. Press the [F6] key.
Follow the window instructions to restore the system.
Notes on Automated System Recovery
ꢀ
Automated System Recovery does not restore data files.
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.6.2 For Windows 2000 Server
● Items Required
•
•
•
Windows 2000 Server CD-ROM
Windows 2000 Server system recovery disk (created beforehand)
Windows 2000 Server First Step Guide
1
2
3
Follow "Windows 2000 Server First Step Guide" to start Windows 2000 Server
setup.
From the [Welcome to Setup] window of the Windows 2000 Server Setup
program, press the [R] key to select restoration.
Follow the message on the setup window to restore the system.
Notes on system restoration
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
The system may return to the initial installation conditions depending on the restoration information
used. In this case, the system must be configured after system restoration.
Windows 2000 Server may have to be reinstalled if system files or system information are severely
The message "The file ******.*** is not the original file copied when Windows 2000 was installed."
appears during file restoration. Press the [Enter] or [A] key to restore the file.
9
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.7 Reinstalling the OS
This section explains the procedure for reinstalling the OS.
9.7.1 Checking before OS Reinstallation
■ Removing the Optional Devices
Remove the following optional devices before reinstallation. Install or connect them after OS
installation.
•
•
•
Optional SCSI devices (e.g., hard disk cabinet, or DAT unit) connected via a SCSI card
Internal hard disk units that do not contain the OS installation folder
USB devices
■ Deletion of Data from the Disc
Reinstallation deletes all disk contents. Save the necessary data and system configuration in a different
location.
■ Other Notes
Notes on initial installation also apply.
9.7.2 Reinstallation Using ServerStart
When the previous installation was performed in guide or preconfiguration mode, the ServerStart floppy
disk used in that installation can be used again. When the reinstallation is performed with the same
configuration as that for the previous installation, you do not have to edit the configuration file on the
ServerStart floppy disk. You do not have to configure setting on wizards. After ServerStart starts up,
click [Start (OS) Installation] to perform installation.
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.8 Changing OS Settings
This section explains the procedure for changing OS settings.
When you have changed to enable Hyper-Threading using the BIOS setting after
starting operation in a one CPU configuration or when you add a CPU, change the
OS to the multi-processor kernel.
When you will reduce the number of CPUs from two to one or disable Hyper-
Threading, change the OS to the uni-processor kernel.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
It is recommended that users of the Linux type or Linux array type refer to the Linux manual supplied
with the server.
Customers using the Linux distribution OS on a diskless type server are advised to refer to the Fujitsu
Hyper-Threading is enabled at the time of purchase. For functions and settings of Hyper-Threading,
ꢀ
ꢀ
Back up the data before changing settings.
Several files must be copied when you change the OS to the multi-processor kernel.
Use the same files as those in the service pack currently applied.
9.8.1 For Windows Server 2003
After adding a CPU or changing the Hyper-Threading setting, starting up the OS changes OS settings. A
pop-up message appears. Follow the window instructions.
9
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.8.2 For Windows 2000 Server
Change OS settings in the following procedure, then add a CPU or change the Hyper-Threading setting.
1
2
Startup Windows 2000 Server.
Start up Device Manager.
1. Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
2. Double-click the [System] icon.
3. Select the [Hardware] tab and click [Device Manager (D)...] in [Device Manager].
Device Manager starts up.
3
Display computer properties.
1. Select [Devices (by type)] from the [View] menu.
2. Select [Computer] in the tree view and click [+] to expand it.
3. Double-click either of the following item.
• [ACPI uni-processor] to change the OS to the multi-processor kernel
• [ACPI multi-processor] to change the OS to the uni-processor kernel
4
5
Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver (P)...].
The [Device Driver Upgrade Wizard] starts up.
Update drivers.
1. Click [Next] in the [Start Device Driver Upgrade Wizard] window.
The [Install Hardware Device Driver] window appears.
2. In search method selection, select [Display known drivers for this device and select
a driver from the list.] and click [Next].
The [Select a Device Driver] window appears.
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
3. Select [Display all hardware in this device class]. From the [Manufacturers] list,
select [(Standard computer)]. Select either of the following from [Models].
• [ACPI multi-processor PC] to change the OS to the multi-processor kernel
• [ACPI uni-processor PC] to change the OS to the uni-processor kernel
ꢀ
If the wrong model is selected, the system does not operate properly. You must reinstall the OS
in some cases. Take great care of changing the OS.
4. Click [Next].
The [Start Device Driver Installation] window appears.
5. Click [Next].
Driver update starts. The [Finish] window appears when it completes.
6. Click [Finish].
The [ACPI Multi-processor PC Properties] window or [ACPI Uni-processor PC Properties]
window appears.
9
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
6
Shut down and turn the server off.
1. Click [Close].
The [System Settings Change] window appears.
2. Click [Yes].
The computer shuts down and restarts automatically.
7
8
Add an optional CPU or change the Hyper-Threading setting in the BIOS Setup
Utility.
Restart the system.
When the OS starts up, check that the item under [Computer] is changed in Device Manager of
Control Panel.
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.9 Maintenance Service
This section explains the details of the maintenance service.
If the cause of the failure is uncertain or if the original condition cannot be restored,
contact the seller or an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
9.9.1 Maintenance Service
■ Non-durable Components
Depending on the environment and usage of the customer, non-durable components of the server may
need to be replaced during the maintenance support period.
Customers who have signed up to hardware maintenance contact will be provided with replacement
parts free of charge and will have higher priority for replacement. Customers not signed up to hardware
maintenance contact will be charged for operation cost (including the maintenance parts) separately.
Replacing non-durable components
ꢀ
To ensure stable operation of the server system, it is recommended that a maintenance service
agreement be purchased.
ꢀ
Lifetime of non-durable components
The lifetime of such components is calculated based on appropriate usage environments.
Although the guaranteed range for operation is set between 10 and 35°C, the lifetime is assumed at a
constant average temperature of 25°C.
ꢀ
Types of non-durable components
table: Non-durable Component List
Component
Description
RAID card battery
Regardless of the time the power was turned on and off, the lifetime is
approximately three years.
9
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.9.2 Contacting Maintenance Support
For "Contact Information", refer to "Start Guide". Before contacting maintenance support, check the
following.
● Item
•
Model name and product ID of the server
They are described on the label on the server. For the label location, refer to "Start Guide".
Hardware configuration (Types and locations of internal options)
Configuration information (BIOS Setup Utility, SCSI Setup Utility settings)
OS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LAN/WAN system configuration
Phenomena (what happened when doing what, what was displayed, etc.)
Date/time of occurrence
Environmental settings of the server
LED statuses
ꢀ
Print and fill in the "Configuration Sheet" of the "Configuration Sheets" and the "Accident Sheet".
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.10Maintenance & Notes
This section explains the details of the maintenance & Notes.
9.10.1Hard disk failure is detected
ꢀ
If hard disk failure is detected during POST, the RX200 S2 on-board SCSI array controller stops with
the following message.
Warning!: The array is degraded. Press [Ctrl] [A] to continue after
insert Floppy Disk.
If the controller stops with this message, insert the floppy disk "OnBoard RAID Utility" into the floppy
disk drive of the system, and press the [Ctrl] key and [A] key at once to start up the system from the
floppy disk. The utility automatically starts up. The following message appears on the utility.
Background command progress status for controller 0...
IR Volume 1
Current operation
Volume ID
Volume status
Volume state
Physical disk I/Os
: None
: 0
: Enabled
: Degraded
: Not quiesced
curState: 1
prvState: 0
Previous Physical Disk States:
ID0 : Failed ID1 : Failed
Current Physical Disk States:
ID0 : Online ID1: Failed
Fatal ERROR happened. Please call support engineer
ꢀ
As shown here, if the message "Fatal Error happened. Please call support engineer." appears, do not
start up the system. Please contact the maintenance person and system administrator.
Background command progress status for controller 0...
IR Volume 1
Current operation
Volume ID
Volume status
Volume state
Physical disk I/Os
: None
: 0
: Enabled
: Degraded
: Not quiesced
curState: 1
prvState: 3
Previous Physical Disk States:
ID0 : Online ID1 : Failed
9
Current Physical Disk States:
ID0 : Online ID1: Failed
OK. You can boot system.
Please check HDD status after boot
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
If the message "OK. You can boot system. Please check HDD status after boot." appears, remove the
defective hard disk following the procedures below.
1
Investigate the hard disk ID where "Failed" appears at both "Previous Physical Disk States" and
"Current Physical Disk States" on the screen. This ID indicates a defective hard disk. In this case,
ID1 is defective. Viewed from the front of the server, the left hard disk is ID0, and the right hard disk
is ID1.
ID0
ID1
2
3
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity from your body.
Lift up the handle of the defective hard disk unit checked in Item 1, and pull it
slightly to the front.
4
5
Wait for about 60 seconds (until the defective hard disk unit starts to rotate),
then pull out the defective hard disk unit.
After ejecting "On Board RAID Utility" from the floppy disk drive, then press
[Ctrl], [Alt], and [Delete] keys simultaneously to reboot the system.
After reboot, the following message appears again. Press [Ctrl] and [A] keys simultaneously to
start up the OS.
Warning!: The array is degraded. Press [Ctrl] [A] to continue after
insert Floppy Disk.
ꢀ
The logical drive enters the critical status, and one hard disk is defective. The logical drive is not
redundant. Set a new hard disk into the hard disk bay where the defective hard disk was mounted as
soon as possible, then start the rebuild processing. If one disk is missing, the rebuild processing stops
with an error message.
For details on the rebuild processing, refer to "Onboard SCSI RAID User’s Guide 5.1 Replacing a Hard
Disk".
ꢀ
If the second hard disk fails while the first hard disk remains defective without replacement and reboot,
the array controller may start up the system from the first defective hard disk depending on the failure
mode of the first hard disk. In that case, the system starts up with old data, and new data may be lost.
To prevent this problem, confirm the hard disk state using On Board RAID Utility, and start up the OS.
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.10.2Operation after Baseboard Replacement
If the baseboard is replaced due to an error when the on-board SCSI array controller function is used for
this server, the logical drive of the array controller is initialized again after replacement. This is because
the data integrity information showing whether data was written correctly in the past is stored in the
baseboard. As the information is lost due to replacement, the initialization is automatically executed to
ensure the data integrity. This does not mean hard disk failure.
For behavior of the initialization, see "Onboard SCSI RAID User’s Guide 1.4 Rebuilding/Initializing a
Logical Drive".
9.10.3 Rebuild Operation by Automatic Recovery of HDD
When the on-board SCSI array controller function is used for this server, if the retry count against
recoverable hard disk error exceeds the threshold, automatic rebuild function runs to check the entire
disk. While the automatic rebuild function is running, the hard disk failure lamp blinks, and the front
maintenance lamp comes on due to the ServerView function.
A log "A manual rebuild has started on logical drive." remains in Log Information Viewer on GAM.
During automatic rebuild, hard disks can be accessed, but the access performance is affected. The
performance may be lowered up to 54%. After automatic rebuild is completed, the hard disk can be used
in the redundant state. But, the hard disk should be replaced as soon as possible.
If the above symptom (lamp, message on GAM) occurs although hard disk is not replaced, please
contact the maintenance person or system administrator.
* For automatic rebuild events, ServerView notification are not executed. However, if automatic rebuild
fails, ServerView notification is done as hard disk failure.
9.10.4Notes on Use of Domain Controller Function
In the case of disk array configuration with the on-board SCSI array controller in this server, if it is used
as a domain controller for Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions, Windows Server 2003, or Windows 2000
Server, the following warning message may be logged in the OS event log during startup.
Type: Warning
Source: Disk
Description: The driver detects a valid writing cache of
\Device\Harddisk0\DR0. The data may be damaged.
For this server, the writing cache is always disabled, and never becomes enabled for the RAID logical
drive configured with SCSI array controllers. However, this message indicates that the logical drive
cache configuration is not correctly recognized. Even if this message is logged, the system operation is
not affected, and data is not damaged.
9
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.10.5Note on System Event Log during Power-ON
Immediately after power-on, the following message log may remain while other memory error logs do
not remain in the system event log. Even if this system event log is logged, a memory error does not
actually occur, and there is no operational problem. You can use the system continuously. The system
event log can be checked using the ServerManagementTools disk. (Related page: "9.3 System Event
Log" (ꢁpg.267))
EventLoggingDisabled S=CorrectableMemoryErrorLoggingDisabled-Deasserted
This event log is the same as the following message on ServerView.
Correctable memory error logging re-enabled
290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Server Specifications
A Server Specifications
This section explains the specifications for the server.
table: Server Specifications - Diskless Type
Item
Functions and Specifications
Diskless type
Type
Model
PGUR2023AA
Standard
64-bit Intel® Processor Xeon™ 3E GHz / 2MB
With the
conversion kit
64-bit Intel® Processor Xeon™ 3.20E GHz / 2MB
64-bit Intel® Processor Xeon™ 3.60E GHz / 2MB
CPU
Number of
multiplication
1 (Max. 2)
Standard
1GB (512MB-DDR2 DIMM × 2)
1GB / 2GB / 4GB (installed in a pair)
16GB (8 slots, 1GB DIMM × 8)
8MB
Memory
modules
Adding size
Maximum
Video RAM capacity
Graphics
VGA chip: ATI RAGE XL
648 × 480, 800 × 600, 1024 × 768, 1280 × 1024
Displayed colors: Differ depending on resolution and OS
1 bay (optional)
CD-ROM drive bay
Types: 24× CD-ROM unit (IDE)
2 bays
3.5-inch storage bay
Standard
Optional
73.4GB /146.8GB /300GB (10,000rpmm, Ultra320 SCSI)
73.4GB (15,000rpm, Ultra320 SCSI)
Adding size
Maximum
Disk array
300GB × 2 = 600GB
Standard (onboard SCSI array controller)
PCI-X × 2
Expansion slots
64-bit/133MHz × 1 (PCI-X, Full-Height, Half-length/LowProfile),
64-bit/66MHz × 1 (LowProfile)
Floppy disk drive
SCSI interface
Network
3.5 inch (2 mode 1.44MB/720KB) (Standard)
Ultra320 SCSI × 1 (standard feature of the baseboard)
LAN (1000BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T) × 2 (standard feature of the baseboard)
LAN × 2, serial × 1, keyboard, mouse, monitor, USB × 3
Option
Interface
Keyboard and Mouse
Width 430 (482) × Depth 710 (770) × Height 43.6 (1U unit)
Values in parentheses are dimensions including projections.
Dimension (mm)
Weight
Max. 19kg
2 - 3 minutes/month
Internal clock precision
Power consumption
Power
Max. 500W/1800kJ/h
100V-240V AC (50/60Hz) / bipolar ground type
Standard: 1, Max.: 2 (when the redundancy option is installed)
Power supply unit
15 (CPU fan × 10, power supply fan × 4, system fan × 1)
Only CPU/power supply fans are redundant.
Fan
Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition / Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition /
Windows 2000 Server / Windows 2000 Advanced Server /
Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS / Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES
OS
The specifications for the server are subject to change for the purpose of improvement without prior notice.
292
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
B Specifications for Internal
Options
A
This section explains the specifications for internal options for the server.
When you have bought a internal option as a standard option, check that the
package contains the following items before use. Should it happen that items are
missing, contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
B.1 CPU Specifications
■ Package
•
•
CPU (1)
Heat sink (1)
■ Specifications
table: CPU Specifications
Functions and Specifications
Item
Processor Xeon™
3.0GHz / 2MB
Processor Xeon™
3.2GHz / 2MB
Processor Xeon™
3.6GHz / 2MB
Product name
Model
PG-FG242
3.0GHz
2MB
PG-FG243
3.2GHz
2MB
PG-FG244
3.6GHz
2MB
Clock frequency
Internal secondary cache size
B.2 Memory Specifications
■ Package
•
DIMM (2)
■ Specifications
table: Memory Specifications
Item
Product name
Model
Functions and Specifications
Memory Module-1GB
PG-RM1BC
Memory Module-2GB
PG-RM2BC
1GB-DDR2 DIMM × 2
2GB
Memory Module-4GB
PG-RM4BC
Modules
512MB-DDR2 DIMM × 2
1GB
2GB-DDR2 DIMM × 2
4GB
Capacity
Clock frequency
Number of pins
400MHz
240
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B Specifications for Internal Options
B.3 Internal CD-ROM Drive Unit Specifications
■ Package
•
CD-ROM ATAPI (1)
■ Specifications
table: Internal CD-ROM Drive Unit Specifications
Item
Model
Functions and Specifications
PG-CD321
IDE (ATAPI)
Interface
Media
CD-ROM (12cm)
Format
CD-ROM
Reading mechanism
Data transfer speed
Access time
Optical pickup using a laser diode
Max. 3,600KB/sec (24× on the outside to 10× on the inside)
114msec (average)
Disk loading mechanism
Disk clamp mechanism
Dimension (drive only)
Weight (excluding a medium)
Manual tray loading
Ball clamp
128.4 × 129.9 × 13.2mm (W × D × H)
About 170g
B.4 Internal Hard Disk Unit Specifications
■ Package
•
Internal hard disk unit (1)
■ Specifications
table: Internal Hard Disk Unit Specifications
Functions and Specifications
Item
Model
PG-HDH71K
PG-HDH41K
Ultra320 SCSI
3.5-inch hard disk
146.8GB 300GB
320MB/s (Ultra320 Wide)
2.99ms
PG-HDH31K
PG-HDH75K
73.4GB
Interface
Storage media
Memory capacity *1
Maximum data transfer speed
Average latency speed
Rpm
73.4GB
2.00ms
10,000rpm
15,000rpm
Energy consumption efficiency
based on the Law Regarding
the Rationalization of Energy
Use *2
0.07
(B class)
0.05
(C class)
0.03
(C class)
0.16
(F class)
Dimension (W x D x H)
Weight *3
101.6 × 146.0 × 25.4 (mm)
0.75kg
0.8kg
3
*1: The value indicates memory capacity of the formatted hard disk (1GB = 1000 bytes).
*2: The value indicates power consumption per 1GB.
*3: A Hot plug carrier is not included.
294
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
B.5 Power Cord Selection
The power cord for this unit has been packed separately and has been selected according to the country
of destination. It must be used to prevent electric shock. Use the following guidelines if it is necessary to
replace the original cord set.
A
The female receptacle of the cord set must meet CEE-22 requirements (see Figure).
■ For the United States and Canada
Use a UL listed and CSA labeled cord set consisting of a three conductor cord with a maximum length
of 15 feet.
For units which stand on a desk or table, type SVT or SJT cord sets should be used.
For units which stand on the floor, only SJT type cord sets should be used.
The cord set must be selected according to the current rating for your unit.
Please consult the table below for the selection criteria for power cords used in the United States and
Canada.
table: Selection Criteria for Power Cords Used in the United States and Canada
Cord Type
Size of Conductors in Cord
Maximum Current Rating of Unit
SJT
18 AWG
16 AWG
14 AWG
10 Amps
12 Amps
12 Amps
SVT
18 AWG
17 AWG
10 Amps
12 Amps
• Parallel
For units set at 115 V:
• Tandem
For units set at 230 V:
use a parallel blade, grounding type
attachment plug rated 15 A, 125 V.
use a tandem blade, grounding type
attachment plug rated 15 A, 250 V.
● For units set at 230 V (outside of the United States and Canada):
Use a cord set consisting of a minimum AWG according to the table above and a grounding type
attachment plug rated 15 A, 250 V. The cord set should have the appropriate safety approvals for the
country in which the equipment will be installed and should be marked HAR.
295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B Specifications for Internal Options
■ For the United Kingdom
Should the plug on the flexible cord not be of the type for your socket outlets, do not use an adapter but
remove the plug from the cord and discard. Carefully prepare the end of the supply cord and fit a suitable
plug.
• This appliance must be earthed.
ꢀ
The wires in this mains lead are colored in accordance with the following code.
• Green and Yellow: Earth
• Blue: Neutral
• Brown: Live
As the colors of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the colored
markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.
•
•
•
The wire which is colored Green and Yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is
marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol or colored Green or Green and Yellow.
The wire which is colored Blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N
or colored Black.
The wire which is colored Brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L
or colored Red.
296
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
C Remote Control Function and
Console Redirection
A
When a personal computer (PC) is connected to the serial port of this server with a
cross cable, the server can be turned on/off or reset from the PC via RS-232C
(remote control function). Console redirection can be performed in the same manner.
The remote control and console redirection functions can be switched between each other.
Perform the following procedures to use these two functions.
•
•
Connecting the server to a PC
Setting the server using the Remote Control Utility
ꢀ
To use the reset function via RS-232C, the terminal software on the PC must have the same
communication speed and flow control mode settings as those on the Remote Control Utility menu.
When both remote control function and BIOS console redirection are used, perform the following
procedures in the BIOS Setup Utility.
ꢀ
• On the [Peripheral Configuration] submenu of the [Advanced] menu, change [Serial Multiplexer] to
[Shared].
• On the [Console Redirection] submenu of the [Server] menu, change [Console Redirect] to
[Enabled].
297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C Remote Control Function and Console Redirection
C.1 Connecting the Server to a PC
Connect the server to a PC using a cross cable.
The server (rear)
Serial port
Cross cable
Personal computer
Serial port
ꢀ
In the BIOS Setup Utility, perform the following setting.
• On the [Peripheral Configuration] submenu of the [Advanced] menu, change [Serial Multiplexer] to
[BMC].
C.2 Operating the Remote Control Utility
The following explains how to operate the Remote Control Utility
■ Connection
1
Connect the serial port to the management terminal using an RS-232C cross
cable.
2
Establish connection using the terminal software.
■ Operation on the Server
Perform the following operations in the terminal software on the management terminal.
1
Establish connection using the terminal software and press the [Enter] key.
The following message appears.
Login>
298
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
2
3
Enter the following command.
Remote [Enter]
The following message appears.
Password>
A
Enter the following command.
Remote [Enter]
The following menu appears.
*******************************************
Welcome to System RX200 S2
BMC FW: *.**
SDRR: *.**
State: Off (na = Currently not available)
*******************************************
REMOTE MAINTENANCE MENU
(1) Immediate Power Down
(2) Immediate Reset
(3) Graceful Power Down
(4) Power Cycle
(5) Power On
(6) View System Eventlog (SEL)
Enter selection or (0) to quit:
The "State" line in the message will show either of the following.
table: Messages in the Main Menu Window
Message
Status
On
The server is turned on.
The server is turned off.
Off
4
Use numeric keys to enter the desired menu number.
The table below shows the menu items and corresponding operations. Unavailable menu items
are indicated with "na" in parentheses to the left of that item.
table: Menu Items and Operations
Menu
Operation
Operation after selecting the item
(1) Immediate
Power Down
The server will be turned off.
When "Do you really want to do this? [y/n]"
appears, enter the following command.
y [Enter]
(2) Immediate Reset The server will be restarted.
(3) Graceful Power
Down
The server will be turned off.
When Windows is running,
the server is turned off after
the OS is shut down.
When "Do you really want to do this? [y/n]"
appears, enter the following command.
y [Enter]
When Windows is running, "System shutdown
due to <software command> in 60 second! Press
Cancel to abort!" appears in the popup window.
Select [OK].
(4) Power Cycle
The server will be restarted.
When Windows is running,
the server is restarted after the
OS is shut down.
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C Remote Control Function and Console Redirection
table: Menu Items and Operations
Menu
Operation
Operation after selecting the item
(5) Power On
The server will be turned on.
-
-
(6) View System
Event log (SEL)
The event log will be
displayed.
(0)
-
The menu closes.
C.3 Switching between Functions
■ Switching from Console Redirection to the Remote Control Function
1
In the terminal software executing console redirection, press the [Esc] key and
press the [Shift] + [8] keys.
Console redirection switches to the remote control function.
For operation of the Remote Control Utility, refer to "Appendix C.2 Operating the Remote
Control Utility" (ꢀpg.298).
■ Switching from the Remote Control Function to Console Redirection
1
Exit the Remote Control Utility.
Select [0] from the menu of the Remote Control Utility.
The following message appears.
Login>
2
Press the [Enter] key, then the [Shift] + [Q] keys.
The terminal software window changes to the console redirection window.
300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
D Recycling
This section explains how to recycle this server.
A
■ Disposing of the Server
When scrapping this server, contact an office listed in the "Contact Information" of the "Start Guide".
This server must be disposed of as industrial waste.
Furthermore, if the server is disposed of as it is, someone else may gain access to the information
contained on the hard disks. It is therefore recommended that all drives be formatted before disposal.
However, just formatting or deleting files may not avoid the risk that the data is restored and used for
wrongful purposes. If confidential or private information is saved, in order to make it impossible to be
restored, it is recommended to use third-party data wiping tools.
■ Disposing of Used-up Batteries
Used-up batteries must be disposed of as industrial waste and therefore require special processing. Let a
licensed industrial waste disposal company take care of disposing them.
■ Disposing of Liquid Crystal Displays
Liquid crystal displays must be disposed of as industrial waste and therefore require special processing.
Let a licensed industrial waste disposal company take care of disposing them.
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Recycling
302
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
Index
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
CPU Status Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Creating a DOS Floppy Disk. . . . . . . . . . . .143
Creating a System Recovery Disk
Creating the Automated System Recovery
A
Application wizard
B
D
Daisy Chain Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Disk Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Driver types
C
E
Changing OS settings
Exit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Expansion cards
Installation location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Installation order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Configuration file
F
Fibre Channel Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Floppy Disk
Inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Floppy disk drive
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Front maintenance LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPMI Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
G
Guided mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
J
H
Hard disk access display LED . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Hard disk access LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
How to install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Hot swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
How to Create Driver Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
K
Keyboard
Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Keyboard connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
L
LAN connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
LAN Driver Advanced Setup . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Intel® PROSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
I
IB HCA Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
If memory dump cannot be collected . . . . . 263
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Installable expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Installation (on multiple servers). . . . . . . . . 104
Guided mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Preconfiguration mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Installation Partition Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Installing
ServerView. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Installing the LAN Driver
Error window after installation. . . . . . . . 262
Intel® PROSet
VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Internal CD-ROM drive unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Installable internal CD-ROM drive units 187
Removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Internal hard disk unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Installation order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Replacing the failed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
M
Main menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Maintenance switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Manual installation
Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Windows 2000 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Memory Dump File Setting
Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Windows 2000 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Memory Module
Memory modules
Defective Memory Disconnection Function
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Installable memory modules. . . . . . . . . 175
Installation location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Installation order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Installing/removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Memory Status Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Mouse
Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
N
Notes on a multiple LAN adapter configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Notes on UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
304
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2 User’s Guide
Preparation of the PXE server. . . . . . . . .88
Starting installation (for a remote resource
server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Remote Service Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Removing Power Supply Unit
O
OS installation wizard
P
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Restoring the system
PCI Device, Embedded LSI SCSI 1020
Power
S
SCSI Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Boot Adapter List menu. . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Device Properties Submenu . . . . . . . . .241
Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
RAID Properties Submenu . . . . . . . . . .242
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
SCSI-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Security
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Prevention of unauthorized use. . . . . . .272
Security Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Selecting the installation method. . . . . . . . . .44
Server
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
ServerStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Cautions When Using ServerStart. . . . . .47
Supported expansion cards. . . . . . . . . . .48
Settings Required Before Operating the Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Slot cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
SNMP service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
R
RAID Configuration
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing the BIOS Information . . . . . . . . . . . 141
System event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
SYSTEM EVENT LOG (SEL) window . . . . 269
System fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
System identification LED button . . . . . . . . . 22
T
Teaming
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Troubleshooting
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
U
USB connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
V
VLAN
Setup procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
W
When multiple LAN adapters are installed . . 46
Windows Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
306
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIMERGY RX200 S2
User's Guide
B7FH-3001-02EN-00
Issued on August, 2005
Issued by FUJITSU LIMITED
• The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice.
• Fujitsu assumes no liability for damages to third party copyrights or other rights
arising from the use of any information in this manual.
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any without the prior written
permission of Fujitsu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|